Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Newman Floyd Lab - Bldg. 2029
PROJECT LOCATION NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS CORNELL UNIVERSITY, ITHACA, NY 14850 CLINTON FRANKLIN ST.LAWRENCE JEFFERSON ESSEX LAKE ONTARIO HAMILTON WARREN OSWEGO NIAGARA ORLEANS MONROE WAYNE GENESEE ONEiDA GARATOGA ONTARIO ;NOME GNONDAG MONTGOMERY MADISON LAKE ERIE OTSEGO RENSS LASE LEANY CHENANGO SCHOHARI CATTARAGUS STEUBEN ALLEGANY DELAWARE BROOME PENNSYLVANIA ULSTER SULL,VAN CUTCHES ORANGE GENERAL LOCATION MAP N.T.S. NEW JERSEY BIDDING 5/22/19 2190850 PROJECT LOCATION DRAWING INDEX LABELL/\ ................ e LOCATION MAP S001 - GENERAL NOTES S100 - STRUCTURAL FRAMING PLANS S101 - LOADING DOCK PLAN S200 -SWITCHGEAR ELEVATIONS S201 - ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS S202 - LOADING DOCK ELEVATIONS M001 - MECHANICAL LEGEND SHEET M101 - BASEMENT MECHANICAL PLAN E101 - PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN Associates, D.P.C. hp R Engineering Architecture Environmental Planning 105 North Tioga, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 www.labellapc.com NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY KIM M'A CD // )�� co c) J U W U CD 0 >- CC CI) oCC W � c QQ CC ›-� CC F"- < C/3 Wo CC u 0 4acf,' LLH NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIR Project Manual & Specifications May 22, 2019 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14853 Architect LaBella Associates, D.P.C 105 North Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK & TABLE OF CONTENTS MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIR Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Form General Conditions and Exhibits DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 51 23 Heat During Construction Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 05 – METALS Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK & TABLE OF CONTENTS MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIR Page 2 DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 14 16 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation Section 23 31 13 Metal Ducts Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems DRAWINGS Title Page S001 General Notes S100 Structural Framing Plans S101 Loading Dock Plan S200 Switchgear Elevations S201 Elevations and Details S202 Loading Dock Elevations M001 Mechanical Legend Sheet M101 Basement Mechanical Plan E101 Partial First Floor Electrical Plan END OF DOCUMENT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repair Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: LaBella Associates, D.P.C 105 North Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, New York 14850 1. PROPOSAL FORMS a. Proposals shall be made only on the forms provided and all blank and underlined spaces in the forms shall be fully filled in, in ink or typed; amount shall be fully stated both in writing and in figures. Proposals shall be signed by Principals or Officers duly authorized to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificate included in the Bid Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name must be fully stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer. 2. RECAPITULATION OR PROPOSAL a. Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, telegraphic or telephonic proposals or modifications will be considered. 3. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Proposals shall be prepared and enclosed in a sealed envelope. Envelope shall be addressed to: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Proposal for: Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repair Submitted by: (Bidder) b. Proposals shall be delivered to the Owner at the address listed above not later than 2:00PM on June 25, 2019. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2 4. BID OPENING a. Proposals will be opened publicly by the Owner in Room 102C, Humphreys Service Building, Cornell University Campus, Ithaca, New York, at the hour and date listed in 3b. The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 5. BIDDING DOCUMENTS a. The Bidding Documents will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements". (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. 6. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED a. Contract Documents may be obtained from the Facilities Contracts website (http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm ). For assistance, call 607-255-5343. b. Printed sets of bid documents will be available at $40.00 per set without refund. No partial sets will be issued. Electronic access to the bid documents including addendums may be obtained for a non-refundable fee of $49.00 at the requestor’s option. All Contract Documents remain the property of the Owner. c. At the request of the successful bidder, Cornell will provide up to five (5) printed sets of drawings and specifications. 7. START OF WORK a. Work at the site shall be started within ten (10) calendar days from the date of issuance of written authorization to proceed and shall be achieve substantial completion of the project no later than September 27, 2019. b. The construction schedule is critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. 8. BONDS a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3 b. Bid Bond. Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 8a above. 9. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor, services, materials, supplies, etc. shall be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. All Proposals shall be irrevocable until contract award, unless the bid is withdrawn. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. 10. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall visit the Site of the proposed work, fully acquaint and familiarize himself with the conditions as they exist and the character of the operations to be carried on under the proposed Contract, and make such investigation as he may see fit so that he shall fully understand the facilities, physical conditions and restrictions attending the work under the Contract. b. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. c. By submitting a Proposal, the Bidder covenants and affirms that he has carefully examined the Drawings, Specifications, associated Bid Documents, the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, and the Site, that he relies on no representation by the Owner, and that from his own investigation he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance, and that as a result of such examination and investigation, he fully understands the conditions of bidding and that he will not make any claim for, and waives any right to damage because of misinterpretation or misunderstanding of the Bid Documents and the conditions of bidding. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4 11. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the Architect, who will send written instructions to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing, addressed to the Architect. Inquiries received by the deadline established at the pre-bid conference will be given consideration. 12. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 1:00PM, June 10, 2019, in Room 133 of the Humphreys Service Building. The purpose of the conference will be to clarify the intent of the Contract Documents if necessary. Results will be published in an Addendum. 13. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the Bid Form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Form, there has been listed the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. 14. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 15. UNIT PRICES a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Unit Prices shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5 16. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. An abbreviated "Schedule of Values" for certain trades and/or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Bidder's Proposal in the Bid Form. b. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. The complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. 17. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Addenda and/or bulletins issued during the bidding period shall be acknowledged in the space provided in the Bid Form. 18. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing the proposed substitutions and the amounts to be deducted from the Base Bid corresponding to each such proposed substitution in the spaces provided in the Bid Form. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 19. SUB-SURFACE CONDITIONS a. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. b. Each Bidder shall, by careful examination, inform himself as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, subsoil and ground water conditions, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. The Bidder may, at his option, conduct tests at his expense, including borings, by prior notification to the Owner. Each Bidder shall make his own deductions of sub- surface conditions which may affect methods or cost of construction of the work hereunder and he agrees that, if awarded the construction contract, he will make no claim for damages or other compensation, except such as are provided for in the Contract Documents, should he encounter conditions during the progress of the work different from those as calculated and/or anticipated by him. 20. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6 21. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 22. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations. 23. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 24. REQUIRED SUBMISSIONS a. Provide with Bid Proposal: (1) Acknowledgement of Addenda and/or Bulletins issued prior to bid opening (2) Certificate as to Corporate Bidder (3) List of Proposed Subcontractors (4) Abbreviated Schedule of Values (5) Alternate Proposals and Unit Prices (6) Completion of Milestone Schedule, if applicable (7) Bid Security b. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) MWBE Utilization Plan (2) Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan (3) Contractor’s Qualification Statement, if requested c. Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION BID FORM BF-1 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIR Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID FORM Submitted by: Date To: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Gentlemen: The undersigned, (Name of Bidder) a (Type of Firm, State of Incorporation, if applicable) of (Address) having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), and the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated May 22, 2019 prepared by LaBella Associates, D.P.C., 105 North Tioga Street, Suite 200, Ithaca, New York 14850, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents for the following considerations: 1. BASE BID a. All work complete, for the sum of ($ ) for MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, LABOR, and SERVICES AND ALL OTHER COSTS. BID FORM BF-2 2. ALTERNATE PROPOSAL a. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein as associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the following Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications. b. If the Bidder desires to indicate that the acceptance of any Alternate or Alternates will result in neither an addition to nor a deduction from the value of the work, he shall enter the phrase "No Change" in response to such Alternate or Alternates. c. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or the Owner and Contractor may agree to all of the following Alternate Proposals within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as. Alternate No. Description ADD DEDUCT NONE $ $ 3. MINORITY AND WOMEN’S BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (M/WBEs) a. The undersigned shall, if awarded the Contract, endeavor to include both Minority and Women Owned Business Enterprises participation and to demonstrate a “good faith effort” with respect to these requirements. Goals shall be as follows: • A goal of 8.8% for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. • A goal of 8.8% for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. BID FORM BF-3 4. START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within ten (10) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed and to achieve substantial completion of the project no later than September 27, 2019. b. The construction schedule is critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. 5. LIST OF PROPOSED PRINCIPAL SUBCONTRACTORS a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the following list for the Sections or Subdivisions of work stated below subject to the following provisions: (1) The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. b. Bidder shall list the names of at least one subcontractor for each Section or Subdivision of the work listed below and shall limit the listing for each such Section or Subdivision to THREE (3) names. c. If Bidder does not propose to employ a Subcontractor for any Section or Subdivision of the work listed below, he shall enter the name of his firm for each such Section or Subdivision. CONCRETE STRUCTURAL STEEL ELECTRICAL BID FORM BF-4 HVAC ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ BID FORM BF-5 6. PRINCIPAL SUBDIVISIONS OR ELEMENTS OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S FORCES a. If awarded a Contract, we will perform the following portions of the Work with forces directly employed by the undersigned: b. If awarded a Contract, the Contractor’s main Project Manager will be: (include resume with bid) The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any to whom they have a reasonable objection. c. If awarded a Contract, the Contractor’s main Superintendent will be: (include resume with bid) The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any to whom they have a reasonable objection. 7. TIME PROGRESS SCHEDULE a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 15, 1.3, A. 8. BONDS a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract to execute and deliver to the Owner "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such form as acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. Such bonds will be furnished by (Name of Surety) b. Bonding Rate for Change Orders. % c. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of $______________________ (10% of Bid Amount) is attached to this Bid. BID FORM BF-6 9. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum. b. To facilitate the evaluation of Bids, the undersigned has included in each part of his Bid the following values for the trades and/or subdivisions of the work as listed below. Values for work included under Alternate Proposals and to General Contractor's costs for General Conditions shall be excluded. Spec Section Trades and/or Subdivision Value Included in Base Bid Division 1 General Requirements Division 2 Existing Conditions Division 3 Concrete Division 5 Metals Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 9 Finishes Division 23 HVAC Division 26 Electrical Total Bid $ BID FORM BF-7 10. SUBSTITUTIONS a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing in the space below the proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. c. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. d. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. Item and Specification Description of Reference Deduction from Base Bid Substitution Section & Page No. Labor Material BID FORM BF-8 11. ACCEPTANCE a. The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall be irrevocable until contract award, unless the bid is withdrawn. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding process. b. If written notice of acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time thereafter before this Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will within ten (10) calendar days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing or delivery of such notice, execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. c. The undersigned further agrees to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds pursuant to Section 7 herein upon execution of Agreement in e-Builder. d. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. e. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. BID FORM BF-9 12. ADDENDUM RECEIPT a. Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications is acknowledged: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: (Bidder) By: Title: Business Address: Dated: BID FORM BF-10 CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of his knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or with any competitor. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated: BID FORM BF-11 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the _____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed, sealed and executed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) (CORPORATE SEAL) Dated: Rev 12.2018 G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIR CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK i Rev 12.2018 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12 ii Rev 12.2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21 ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26 iii Rev 12.2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31 ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32 iv Rev 12.2018 EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation 1 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing. B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. 2 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. 3 Rev 12.2018 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. 4 Rev 12.2018 Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work. Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. 5 Rev 12.2018 B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge, up to five (5) sets of Contracts Documents and one (1) set of reproducible sepias. B. Any sets in excess of the number mentioned above may be furnished to the Contractor at the cost of reproduction and mailing. C. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. 6 Rev 12.2018 Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 7 Rev 12.2018 Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. 8 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as- built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit. 9 Rev 12.2018 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages 1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay. 10 Rev 12.2018 6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto. 11 Rev 12.2018 Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section. 12 Rev 12.2018 Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. 13 Rev 12.2018 G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or 2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. 14 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. 15 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors. C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work. 16 Rev 12.2018 E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form. 17 Rev 12.2018 C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found at: https://sp.ehs.cornell.edu/env/solid-waste/construction-demolition-waste/Pages/default.aspx D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken. 18 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 19 Rev 12.2018 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. 20 Rev 12.2018 D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. 21 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. 22 Rev 12.2018 Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. 23 Rev 12.2018 B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the E- Builder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. 24 Rev 12.2018 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project. B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment. 3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment. 25 Rev 12.2018 4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage. 5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University. Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06. B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well. 26 Rev 12.2018 Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. 27 Rev 12.2018 f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub- subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. 28 Rev 12.2018 B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. 29 Rev 12.2018 Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Jake Duell) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the implementation of MBE and WBE goals. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement. 30 Rev 12.2018 C. For purposes of this procurement, the Owner has established goals as outlined in the Bid Form for Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (“MBE”) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (“WBE”) participation. 1. The goal for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. 2. The goal for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. D. For purposes of providing meaningful participation by MWBEs on the Contract and achieving the Contract Goals established in paragraph C above, the Contractor should reference the Directory of New York State Certified MWBEs found at the following internet address: http://www.esd.ny.gov/mwbe.html. E. Where MWBE goals have been established herein, the Contractor must document “good faith efforts” to provide meaningful participation by MWBEs as sub-contractors or suppliers in the performance of the Contract. F. Where it appears that a Contractor is unable to comply with the MWBE participation requirements, Contractor may submit in writing for the Owner’s consideration, the reasons for Contractor’s inability to meet any or all of the participation requirements together with an explanation of the efforts taken by the Contractor to obtain the stated MWBE participation. Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan A. The Contractor shall submit a MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the Owner’s review prior within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of a Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed. B. The Contractor shall use such Owner approved MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the performance of MWBEs on the Contract pursuant to the prescribed MWBE goals established in Article 16 hereof. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the MBE/WBE Utilization Plan of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report attached hereto as Exhibit "D". Section 16.04 Reports and Records A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Plans. Electronic versions are available in the E-Builder Resources Project or at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project- contractors-and-consultants. 1. MWBE Utilization Plan 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report 31 Rev 12.2018 B. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of the Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the progress made towards achievement of the MWBE goals of the Contract. Such forms shall be uploaded monthly to E-Builder. C. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records and accounts by the Owner for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with the provisions of this Article. The Contractor shall include this provision in every subcontract so that such provision will be binding upon each subcontractor. ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. 32 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. 33 Rev 12.2018 ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. EXHIBIT "A" CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request. Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as stated on their Bid Form at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract. EXHIBIT "A" EXHIBIT "A" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY DATE: PCO # PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1 DIRECT COST OF WORK: NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TO TAL PERFORMING WORK COST TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0 TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B" FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title: Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "C" GUARANTEE Date: In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 1 MWBE Utilization Plan – Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed – – Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project – PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value: Contractor Name and Address:Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date: % Goals MBE: 8.8% WBE: 8.8% Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE (List your firm if also MBE or WBE) Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates (Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title: Signature: Date: MWBE Contract Percentages Summary % MBE Totals WBE Totals EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 2 MWBE Utilization Plan – Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed – – Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project – PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year: General Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub- Subcontractor, or Vendor Trade Dollar Value of SubContract or Purchase Order MBE, WBE, or N/A % of Total Contract TOTALS 0 0 EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number): MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title: Date: Signature: EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III EXHIBIT "E" LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: TRADE: EFFECTIVE DATE: EXPIRATION DATE: Base Hourly Rate: $ Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour F.I.C.A. Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) *Worker's Compensation *Bodity Injury & Property Damage Disability TOTAL % Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % = $ * Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour Vacation Health & Welfare Pension Annuity Education / Training Industry Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $ Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $ Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices: $ CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION Signature of Authorized Representative: Print Name: Print Title: I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance with actual and true cost incurred. Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience modifications have been applied against manual rate. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "F” STORED MATERIALS INVOICING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR: REASON FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________ DATE: 1 Material Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored: 2 Material Value Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value. $ 3 Certificate of Insurance Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name "Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials. 4 Transfer of Title The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "G" Contractor Performance Evaluation Project Information Project Name:____________________________________________ Date Of Evaluation___________________ Project Number___________________________ Evaluators; Project Team_____________________________ Campus_________________________________ Project Start Date_________________________ Substantial Completion________________ Contractor______________________________________________ Prequalification Status_________________ Original Contract Amount__________________________________ Total Change Order Amount_____________ Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________ Initial Evaluation_____ Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________ Final Evaluation_____ Type Of Contract Prime Contractor___ Subcontractor___ Construction Manager___ Project Comments/Description Performance Evaluation Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating. Fails to Achieve Needs Fully Achieve Freq Exceeds Cons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 1 Quality of Workmanship Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications b. Workmanship quality and accuracy c. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel Comments: 2 Scheduling/Productivity Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and meeting contract schedules and milestones a. Project schedule quality and completeness b. Controlling of project schedule c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule d. Material deliveries to support project schedule e. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones f. Productivity of work force g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues. Comments: 3 Subcontractor Management Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating subcontractors (if no subcontractors rate overall management performance) Comments: 3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation For contractor information only a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance Comments: b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance Comments: c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully Achieve Freq Exceeds Cons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 4 MBE/WBE Participation Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors Comments: 5 Safety Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safety a. Timely submission of site specific safety program b. Knowledge of OSHA standards c. Implementation of safety rules and regulations d. Promotion and creation of safety awareness e. Daily overall housekeeping f. Safety record g. Response to safety concerns h. Awareness of public safety Comments: 6 Contract Administration Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract administration as per criteria below a. Timely submission of complet and correct documentation required for insurance and bond b. Change order processing c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings, and change orders d. Subcontractor payments made promptly e. Timely submission of complete and correct payment applications f. Quality of paperwork Comments: 7 Working Relationships Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties (Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.) Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully Achieve Freq Exceeds Cons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 8 Supervisory Personnel Rating Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory personnel and project management staff Comments: 9 Contract Close-Out Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project a. Timely completion of all punchlist items b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's, As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety) d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion of any outstanding audit questions Comments: Summary Sheet Project:___________________________________________ Contractor:________________________________________ Rating Per Weight Performance Categories Category % Scoring 1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00% 0 2 Scheduling 0 10.00% 0 3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00% 0 4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00% 0 5 Safety 0 10.00% 0 6 Contract Administration 0 10.00% 0 7 Working Relationships 0 10.00% 0 8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00% 0 9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00% 0 Over All Rating 0 Rating Reference Fails to achieve expectation 1 Needs improvement 2 Fully achieves expectation 3 Frequently exceeds expectation 4 Consistently exceeds expectation 5 OWNER COMMENTS: OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings: CONTRACTOR COMMENTS: (To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MAY 22, 2019 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIR CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK MAY 22, 2019 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS .........................................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ..............................................................1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ..............................................................................2 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION ..........................................................................2 1.5 PARKING ..........................................................................................................2 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................3 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION ............................4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS...................................................................5 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ........................5 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. ...................................5 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................6 1.12 WORKING HOURS ..........................................................................................7 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................7 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................1 4.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 4.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 4.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 4.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................2 4.4 PRODUCTS LIST .............................................................................................2 4.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 4.6 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................3 4.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL ........................................................3 4.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS ............................................................................4 4.9 SUBSTITUTIONS .............................................................................................6 4.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ..........................................................................8 4.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ..........................................................8 4.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................9 5.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................9 6.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................9 MAY 22, 2019 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ......................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .................................................................1 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) ......................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.4 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ......................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................1 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ...........................................................................1 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................2 1.5 SUBMISSIONS .................................................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ..........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3 3.1 DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................3 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ........................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................1 3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS ....................................................1 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS .........................................................................1 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS .......................................................1 MAY 22, 2019 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE.................................................1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ...........................................................................................3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA .............................................................................................3 1.5 SAMPLES..........................................................................................................4 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS.......5 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................6 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................9 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ........................................................................10 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS ...............................................................................12 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................12 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES .................................................................................12 1.13 DISTRIBUTION..............................................................................................13 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .......................................................................................14 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .....................................................................................14 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY ....................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ....................................1 1.3 AERIAL WORK PLATFORMS .......................................................................2 1.4 ASBESTOS........................................................................................................3 1.5 LEAD .................................................................................................................3 1.6 MERCURY COLLECTION ..............................................................................3 1.7 SITE VISITS ......................................................................................................4 1.8 CONFINED SPACE ..........................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 MAY 22, 2019 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................1 1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE .....................................2 1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION ...............................................................................2 1.7 DUST CONTROL .............................................................................................2 1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT .....................................................3 1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK ....................3 1.10 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS .......................................................4 1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ........................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ..............................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .......................................................................................1 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES ..................................................................1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES .............................................................................1 1.2 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1 1.3 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................2 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................2 MAY 22, 2019 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.......................................................1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................2 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................2 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................4 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ..............................................................................4 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ..........................................................5 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................................18 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................18 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION ..................................................1 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS.......................................................2 1.4 TESTING ...........................................................................................................3 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 SECTION 01 45 33 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS ..........................................................................................2 1.4 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.5 PAYMENT ........................................................................................................2 1.6 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES .........................................................................2 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................2 1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY ...............................................................................3 2.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING ................................................................................3 3.0 DOCUMENTATION ...................................................................................................4 3.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS .............................................................................4 3.2 COMMUNICATION .........................................................................................5 3.3 DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS .......................................................................5 3.4 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS..............................................5 MAY 22, 2019 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ...........................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES.........................................................1 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION ...............................................................2 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................4 2.5 SUPPORTS ........................................................................................................4 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES ........................................................................4 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL ................................................................5 2.8 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION ..................................................5 2.9 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ..........................9 2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ...................................................9 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................9 3.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................................9 3.2 GENERAL .........................................................................................................9 3.3 REMOVAL ......................................................................................................10 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ...............................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ..........................1 2.3 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ..................................................2 2.4 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................3 2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES .......................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3 3.1 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................3 SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION .................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY............................................................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................1 MAY 22, 2019 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ........................................................1 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE.........................................................................................1 1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE .................................................................................2 1.5 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................3 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .......................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING ...................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.4 WARRANTIES .................................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................4 2.1 MATERIALS .....................................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................5 3.1 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................5 3.2 PREPARATION ................................................................................................5 3.3 PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................................5 3.4 CLEANING .......................................................................................................8 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................3 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ...........................................................................................3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 MAY 22, 2019 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ...........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................3 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED .............................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................4 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS .................................................................................5 3.3 ROOF WARRANTY PACKAGE .....................................................................5 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS...................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES..................................1 1.3 RECORDING ....................................................................................................1 1.4 SUBMITTAL .....................................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work to be Done 1. Replacement of slab on deck with formed concrete slab. 2. Replacement of concrete topping and waterproofing. 3. Relocation of existing electrical and mechanical equipment to accommodate the structural repairs. 4. Structural concrete repair. B. The Scope of the Work 1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity. 2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. 3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts. B. New York State Electric & Gas (NYSEG): 1. Contractor shall be responsible for the project management of NYSEG work including coordinating any scheduling associated with the Project. 2. The Owner shall be responsible for the cost associated with the work to be performed by NYSEG. No NYSEG costs shall be carried in the Contractor’s bid. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations. B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times. C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges. D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area. E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required. F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative. G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work. H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work. K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative. L. Parking may be made available for staging at Palm Road or other pre-determined area for the duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing and maintaining the designated area. All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with Transportation Services. 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards. B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist. 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction. 1.5 PARKING A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Jake Duell) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm. C. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows: 1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area. 2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. 3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements. 4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site. D. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore. 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding. B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses. D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative. E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative. H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION A. General 1. Building entrance at Loading Dock must remain open and a safe path of egress maintained for pedestrian access to ground floor. Temporary platform/walkway may be needed. (To be coordinated with Cornell Project Manager and Building Occupants) 2. Vehicle access lane adjacent to Loading Dock (West side) must remain open and clear for normal traffic flow. 3. Normal Loading Dock deliveries will be affected, Contractor to work with Cornell PM and Building Occupants to ensure daily deliveries are coordinated. 4. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. 5. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. 6. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. 7. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. Interference 1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention. 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned. B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions: 1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required. 2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. 3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications. 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. A. Before Submitting Proposal 1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work. 2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. 3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area 1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. 2. Inspect all adjacent work. C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement 1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. 2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. D. Existing or Archived Drawings 1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing current conditions. 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the following dates and hours is required. 1. Stand-Down Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site): a. Reunion Weekend Saturday, June 8, 2019 Sunday, June 9, 2019 2. Restricted Work Dates (delivery & demolition restrictions but otherwise work as usual): Thursday, Friday June 6 - 7, 2019 Reunion guest arrivals- no work outside fence; no demo or utility work inside fence 3. Student and Campus Life Residence Halls Open August 23, 2019 No deliveries, no hauling materials into or out of the project site. All work to be contained to the fenced area of the project site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-7 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.12 WORKING HOURS A. Normal work hours are 7AM-3:30PM Monday-Friday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 14 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 4.0 GENERAL 4.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 4.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes. a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 4.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid 4.4 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 4.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods. 2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 4.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products. 4.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL A. Equivalents or Approvals - General 1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted. 2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved. 3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal to any named product. 4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor. B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding 1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract. 2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense. 4.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named. 1. Products: a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 2. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-6 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with requirements. - Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Form as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner. 4.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-7 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage. 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: - Product description. - Reference standards. - Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations. 4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. 5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project. 6. List any changes required in other work or projects. 7. Designate any required license fees or royalties. 8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials. D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum. E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor. 2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-8 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution. 4.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product or manufacturer: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product specified. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. 4.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-9 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 4.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution. 5.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 6.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS NEWMAN LAB LOADING PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representative(s) 2. Contractor(s) 3. Architect and its professional consultants 4. Major Subcontractors 5. Major suppliers 6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS NEWMAN LAB LOADING PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR D. Minimum Agendum: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids 10. Temporary utilities CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS NEWMAN LAB LOADING PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 11. Safety and first-aid procedures a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period. B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting 4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts 5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule 9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS NEWMAN LAB LOADING PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 10. Coordination of schedules 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required 12. Maintenance of quality standards 13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date b. Effect on other contracts of the Project 15. Other business D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting. B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT NEWMAN LAB LOADING ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL (ePM) SYSTEM MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project. 1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use on the Project. B. There are no fees to utilize this system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system. B. Training 1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT NEWMAN LAB LOADING ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL (ePM) SYSTEM MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software: 1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/down loading capability 2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production 3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly 4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera 5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and pre- construction surveys. 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within the ePM system. B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on this project. C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically. D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner. E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT NEWMAN LAB LOADING ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL (ePM) SYSTEM MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited. G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00. H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis. I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports. J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including but not limited to: 1. General Progress Photographs 2. RFI Issues 3. Non-Conforming Work 4. Special Events 5. As required by individual Specification Sections K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats. L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project. M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team. N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system. O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders. P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT NEWMAN LAB LOADING ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL (ePM) SYSTEM MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis. 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project. B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein. C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 50*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE NEWMAN LAB LOADING CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values. E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules. 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE NEWMAN LAB LOADING CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list: a. Site clearing b. Site utilities c. Foundation work d. Structural framing e. Subcontractor work f. Equipment installations g. Finishes h. Pre-Installation meetings 3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified. B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect. 3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE NEWMAN LAB LOADING CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy. B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Owner Job Site personnel 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 16*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION NEWMAN LAB LOADING PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Progress Submittals 1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. 2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder within five (5) days of taking photographs. 3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the view. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction. 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work. B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review. C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note location on Key Plan. 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work, for submission as project record documents. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 33*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 5. Coordination Drawings 6. Certification of Asbestos free products 7. Owner audio/visual 8. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be needed. C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any non- electronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications, listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents. C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information: 1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review) 2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor review) 3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review) 4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review) 5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review) 6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional) 7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required) 9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required) 10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required) 12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required) D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below. E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described in section 01 32 16. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Submittal: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”. 1.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free. See Section 01 35 29. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. 1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. 3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition. D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations. 5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. 6. Submittals: a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports. B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-6 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR F. Submittals: 1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”. 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide electronic record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available. B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item. C. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to, corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available. 1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices, and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings. 2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 3. Include room names and numbers of each space. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-7 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. 5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit signs, fire alarm devices, and other devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the design intent. 6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure maintenance accessibility and prevent conflict between each portion of the Work. 7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all mechanical and electrical systems and associated components are to be installed as tight to underside of structure as possible. 8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical systems, communications systems, security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, to avoid interference with existing conditions, structural frame, ceilings, partitions, services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor shall be responsible to resolve conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work. Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and dated by the entity(s) affected by the adjustments. 9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. 10. Show location and size of access doors and access panels required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. 11. Indicate required installation sequences. 12. Indicate dimensions, elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements and notify Architect. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. 14. Indicate locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-8 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components and notify Architect. 16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated information, show fully- dimensioned locations of all items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit, and other services. Show dashed outline locations of laboratory casework, shelving, and other items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor. 17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire- protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate paths of egress from rooms. Indicate paths for equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for access and maintenance. 18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and structural penetrations are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by Architect for structural penetrations. 19. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, accessories, and support systems. Show locations of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. 20. Electrical Work: Show electrical distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, fire alarm, and other device locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way, generator, and motor control center locations. Show location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems. Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions, clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. 21. Fire Suppression System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. 23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall sign and date coordination drawings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-9 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 24. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. Review of coordination drawings shall not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with existing conditions and each portion of the Work. D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building. 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened with all costs to remediate the situation. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions 3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-10 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work. I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings. L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened. An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-11 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule. 11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation 1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful description. 5. Include the following information on submittal documentation: a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product. b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-12 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. Submittal Transmittal: 1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. 2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Provide a record copy of the submittal to the Commissioning Agent in electronic format. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system. Provide document in PDF format. B. Record copy of the submittal must be forwarded to the Commissioning Agent within fourteen (14) calendar days of the final approved submittal. C. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual. 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. 2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following: 1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-13 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit. 6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them 7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action. b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action. D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action. E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. 1.13 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators 8. Architect 9. Owner CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 01 33 00-14 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://sp.ehs.cornell.edu/osh/occupational-safety/contractor-safety/Pages/default.aspx 1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements. 2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment. 3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment. B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone. 1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work. D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP. E. Definitions: 1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply. 2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): • The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code). • The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2). 3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu 4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert. 1.3 AERIAL WORK PLATFORMS A. The preferred method for Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs) boom storage is fully retracted and fully lowered to the ground. B. In some circumstances booms may need to be stored in the air because of vandalism concerns, minimal size of storage location, etc. 1. If this is case, the area under the elevated boom must be blocked or arranged such that prevents people from walking, standing, working or parking vehicles underneath. 2. When booms are stored in the air consult the extended weather forecast. Booms should not be stored in the air during predicted high winds, or severe storms. AWPs become unstable at winds or gusts greater than 25 mph and must be fully lowered to prevent a tip-over. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.4 ASBESTOS A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions. B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. C. Removal and disposal of asbestos containing material shall be performed by the Owner under separate contract. 1.5 LEAD A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint. 1.6 MERCURY COLLECTION A. Building may contain mercury. Mercury is a metal that is liquid at room temperature and is toxic to humans and the environment. Mercury can accumulate under laboratory benches and especially in the pipes in old laboratories. Dismantling old fixtures with care can prevent unnecessary spills. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. Mercury is regulated by OSHA and the EPA. If encountered, mercury shall be collected safely utilizing proper measures to prevent exposure and must be turned over to Cornell Environmental Health & Safety for disposal. In the event of a spill, leave and secure the area, call Cornell Dispatch 255-1111 and request the campus Spill Response Team. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.7 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. 1.8 CONFINED SPACE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals: 1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”). 2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan. 3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material Supplier. 4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management. 5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials. 6. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications. 1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE A. In accordance with Section 01 14 00, only that portion of the working area that is absolutely necessary and essential for the work shall be cleared for construction. All clearing should be approved and performed to provide minimum practical exposure of soils. B. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs and lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or environmental quality of the area. C. Topsoil excavated as part of the Project, which can be reused as part of the Project, shall be stockpiled for future use and temporarily stabilized to prevent erosion. 1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements 1.7 DUST CONTROL A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to control dust. C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations. 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities. 5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative. 6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures. 1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing. The following shall require approval of the Owner: 1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative. 1.10 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. 1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://sp.ehs.cornell.edu/env/solid-waste/construction-demolition-waste/Pages/default.aspx CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL NEWMAN LAB LOADING SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site. 2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials. 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL NEWMAN LAB LOADING SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area. 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL NEWMAN LAB LOADING SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill. f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area. d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so. e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL NEWMAN LAB LOADING SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required. The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA DESCRIPTION Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons. Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water. A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802. Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: 1. The date and time of the spill or release. 2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL NEWMAN LAB LOADING SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site. 9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation. 10. The extent of injuries, if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals. 12. Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. (1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you. (2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 44*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition. 1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition. C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting: 1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State. 2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work. 3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. C. Install All Work in Compliance with: 1. NYS Uniform Code a. International Building Code b. International Residential Code c. International Existing Building Code d. International Fire Code e. International Plumbing Code f. International Mechanical Code g. International Fuel Gas Code h. International Property Maintenance Code i. Uniform Code Supplement 2. NYS Energy Code a. International Energy Conservation Code b. ASHRAE 90.1 c. Energy Code Supplement 3. National Electric Code 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 6. All local ordinances 7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials and equipment incorporated in such construction. E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation. F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative. G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner. H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor. I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval. J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.” CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position. P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for. Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable. S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed. T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project construction. V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor. W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work. X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged. Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract. Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the contractor for construction purposes. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement. 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500 ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES NEWMAN LAB LOADING REFERENCES 01 42 00-18 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 42 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL NEWMAN LAB LOADING QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection: 1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. a. Agenda to include the following: i. Appointment ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project. iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required. iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements. v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements. vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work. vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration. viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500. ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL NEWMAN LAB LOADING QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410. xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment. xii. Special safety requirements and procedures. b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting: i. Project Manager. ii. Project Field Supervisor iii. Subcontractor iv. Architect’s Representative v. Owner’s Representative vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable vii. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work. 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL NEWMAN LAB LOADING QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track non- conforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES SECTION 01 45 33 CODE REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Special Inspections and Structural Testing shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of the Building Code of New York State (BCNYS). B. Hold a Special Inspections preconstruction meeting at least seven (7) days prior to the initial planned date for start of construction. 1. Discussion shall include the following: a. Review of specifications and Schedule of Special Inspections for work requiring Special Inspections. b. Responsibilities of Contractor, Owner, Testing Agency, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professional. c. Notification and reporting procedures. 2. Attendees shall include the Contractor, Owner’s representative, Testing Agency, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professionals for Structural Engineering and for Architecture. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Registered Design Professional: The licensed Professional Engineer or Registered Architect whose seal appears on the Construction Drawings. B. Code Enforcement Official: The Officer or other designated authority charged with administration and enforcement of the BCNYS. C. Testing/Inspecting Agency: An agent retained by the Special Inspector or by the Owner and coordinated by the Special Inspector, to perform some of the inspection services on behalf of the Special Inspector. (An example of an Inspecting Agent is a Geotechnical Engineer.) D. Statement of Special Inspections: A document prepared by the Registered Design Professional and filed with and approved by the Code Enforcement Official that includes the Schedule of Special Inspections listing the materials and work requiring Special Inspections. This document includes the inspections and verifications required for the project and the individuals, agencies, and/or firms who will be retained to perform these services. E. Continuous Special Inspection: The full-time observation of work by the Special Inspector or Testing Agency while the work is being performed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES F. Periodic Special Inspections: The part-time or intermittent observation of work by the Special Inspector or Testing Agency for work that has been or is being performed and at the completion of the work. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall be accepted by the Owner. B. Special Inspections shall be performed by agents who have relevant experience for each category of inspections indicated on the drawings. C. Minimum qualifications of inspection agents are indicated on the drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit to the Registered Design Professional and Code Enforcement Official for review, a copy of their qualifications including the names and qualifications of each of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections or tests. B. The Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency shall disclose any past or present business relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors whose work will be inspected or tested. 1.5 PAYMENT A. The Owner will engage and pay for the services of the Special Inspector and Testing/Inspecting Agency. B. If any materials requiring Special Inspections are fabricated in a plant not located within 200 miles of the project site, the Contractor shall be responsible for the travel expenses of the Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any retesting or re-inspection of work failing to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Owner will provide the Special Inspector with a complete set of Contract Documents sealed by the Registered Design Professional and approved by the Code Enforcement Official. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Special Inspector and his agents so that Special Inspections and testing may be performed without hindrance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES B. As indicated in the Schedule of Special Inspections, the Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector and/or Testing/Inspecting Agency at least 48 hours in advance of a required inspection or test. C. The Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to the work to be inspected or tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, and for storage and curing of test samples. D. If Special Inspections or testing require the use of the Contractor’s scaffolding to access work areas, the Contractor shall provide a competent person to perform the daily evaluation of the scaffolding to verify that it is safe to use. The Contractor shall notify the Special Inspector and Testing Agent of this review before each use. The Contractor is responsible for the safe assembly and stability of the scaffolding. E. The Contractor shall keep the latest set of Construction Drawings, field sketches, accepted shop drawings, and specifications at the project site for field use by the Inspectors and Testing Technicians. F. The Contractor shall perform remedial work (if required) and sign non-conformance reports stating that remedial work has been completed. The Contractor shall submit signed reports to the Special Inspector as work proceeds. G. The Special Inspection program shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or from implementing an effective Quality Control program. H. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction site safety. 1.8 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY A. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not have control over the Contractor’s means and methods of construction. C. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not be responsible for construction site safety. D. The Special Inspector or Testing/Inspecting Agency shall not have the authority to stop the work. 2.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall follow the Special Inspection requirements developed by the Architect/Engineer of Record. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES 3.0 DOCUMENTATION 3.1 RECORDS AND REPORTS A. Detailed reports shall be prepared of each test or inspection. The reports shall include the following general information: 1. Project name and number. 2. Date of test or inspection. 3. Name of Testing Agency or Inspecting Agency. 4. Name of technician or inspector. 5. Weather conditions. 6. Locations and elevations of specific areas tested or inspected referenced to gridlines. 7. Description of test or inspection. 8. Reference to applicable ASTM standard. 9. Summary of observations, results, and recommendations. 10. Description of any areas or materials requiring retesting or re-inspection. B. Concrete compressive strength test reports shall contain the following information: 1. Name of Contractor and concrete supplier. 2. Name of concrete testing service. 3. Name of technician making and testing specimens. 4. Truck number and delivery ticket number. 5. Date and location within the structure of concrete placement. 6. Concrete type, class, mix proportions of materials, and design compressive strength at 28 days. 7. Slump, air content, unit weight, and concrete temperature. 8. Total time period between batching and completion of placement for each truck. 9. Compressive strength and type of break for all tests. C. Field reports for concrete inspection shall contain the general information noted above, plus ambient temperature and cylinder numbers. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES D. Test reports for masonry materials shall include proportions, composition, and compressive strength. 3.2 COMMUNICATION A. The Testing/Inspecting Agency shall immediately notify the Owner, Contractor, Special Inspector, and Registered Design Professional by telephone, fax, or email of any test results failing to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The Special Inspector shall immediately notify the Contractor of any work found to be in nonconformance with the Contract Documents during inspections. If the nonconforming work is not corrected while the Special Inspector is on-site, the Special Inspector shall notify the Owner and Registered Design Professional within 24 hours (one business day) and issue a nonconformance report. The Special Inspector may use the Special Inspection Non- Conformance Report form at the end of this section or other similar form. C. If the nonconforming work is not corrected at the time of substantial completion of the structure or other appropriate time, the Special Inspector shall notify the Owner. 3.3 DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS A. The Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit reports to the Owner, Special Inspector and the Registered Design Professional within seven (7) days of the inspection or test. Legible handwritten reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available. B. The Special Inspector shall submit reports to the Owner and Registered Design Professional within seven (7) days of the inspections. Legible handwritten reports may be submitted if final typed copies are not available. C. If requested by the Code Enforcement Official, the Special Inspector shall submit interim reports which include all inspections and tests performed since the beginning of construction or since the previous interim report. Interim reports shall be addressed to the Code Enforcement Official with copies sent to the Registered Design Professionals (Structural Engineer and Architect) and Contractor. Interim reports shall be signed by the agent performing inspections. 3.4 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. At the completion of work, each Testing/Inspecting Agency shall submit an Agent’s Final Report of Special Inspections to the Special Inspector stating that work was completed in substantial conformance with the Contract Documents and that appropriate inspections and tests were performed. The Testing/Inspecting Agency may use the Agent’s Final Report of Special Inspections form provided at the end of this section or other similar form. B. At the completion of work, the Special Inspector shall compile all inspection and test reports generated by each Agent into a Final Report of Special Inspections. The Final Report of Special Inspections shall state that required inspections have been performed and shall itemize any nonconforming work not corrected or resolved. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-6 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES C. The Special Inspector may use the Final Report of Special Inspections form provided at the end of this section or other similar form based on CASE Form 102-2001. D. The Special Inspector shall submit The Final Report of Special Inspections to the Owner, Registered Design Professional and Code Enforcement Official prior to issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-7 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES SPECIAL INSPECTION NON-CONFORMANCE REPORT NO. DATE: ___________________________ TO: CC: Contractor: FROM: ___________________________, Special Inspector PROJECT: PART I: REFERENCE SPECIAL INSPECTION REPORT NO. (Attach copy of report) DESCRIPTION OF NON-CONFORMANCE: RDP RESPONSE: (PROVIDE ATTACHMENTS IF NECESSARY) RDP SIGNATURE ____________________________________ DATE__________________ IS RE-INSPECTION BY SPECIAL INSPECTOR REQUIRED □ YES □ NO PART II: CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION (To be completed by either the [General Contractor or Construction Manager] or Subcontractor and returned to the Special Inspector and the RDP.) I verify that as of the date listed, the non-conforming item noted above has been corrected as required. Date Completed By (Contractor’s Site Representative) CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-8 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES AGENT’S FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Project Name: Special Inspector: Location: Agent: Special Inspector’s Project: Agent’s Project: To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Special Inspections or testing required for this project and designated for this Agent in the Statement of Special Inspections (which includes the Schedule of Special Inspections) submitted for permit have been performed and discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following: Comments: [Attach continuation sheets if required to complete description of uncorrected discrepancies.] Respectfully submitted, Agent of the Special Inspector ______________________________________________ (Type or print name) ______________________________________________ Signature Date ______________________________________________ Address ______________________________________________ City, State, Zip Design Professional Seal or Certification CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 33 Ithaca, New York CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES NEWMAN LAB LOADING CODE-REQUIRED 01 45 33-9 DOCK & MECHANICAL SPECIAL INSPECTIONS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR AND PROCEDURES FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS Project Name: Registered Design Professionals Location: Architecture: Name Address Owner: CORNELL UNIVERSITY Owner’s Address: Structural Engineering: Name Address Special Inspector: Name Address To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Special Inspections required for this project and itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections (which includes the Schedule of Special Inspections) submitted for permit have been performed and discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following: Comments: [Attach continuation sheets if required to complete description of uncorrected discrepancies.] Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Agent’s Final Reports of Special Inspections are attached and are also a part of this Final Report. Respectfully submitted, Special Inspector ______________________________________________ (Type or print name) ______________________________________________ Signature Date ***END OF SECTION 01 45 33*** Professional Seal CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may direct. B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and services. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site. B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and - protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed. - Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global. - No fire watch will be required in most cases. b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed. - Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service. - Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Equipment: 1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. 2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. 4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas. 6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use. 8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire- protection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during construction. C. Enforce fire-safety discipline: 1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. 3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. 4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings. 5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other such equipment. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 SUPPORTS A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same. 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior, maintain in-place until installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. 3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. 4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or curing requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or detrimental conditions and effects. B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from construction work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations. 2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure systems until new exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible. 3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible. 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of water at all times. B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor. 2.8 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION A. Preserve and protect existing trees, plants and lawns at the site which are designated to remain, and those adjacent to the site. B. Consult with Owner, and remove agreed-on roots and branches which interfere with construction. 1. Employ certified arborist to remove, and to treat cuts. C. Provide temporary fences to a height of six feet, around each, or around each group of trees and plants. Provide temporary lawn protection to prevent soil compaction. Reference Cornell University Design Standards and Details for wood and chain fencing below. D. Protect root zones of trees, plants and lawn areas: 1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking. 2. Do not store materials or products. 3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 4. Prevent puddling or continuous running water. E. Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling, and subsequent construction operations to prevent damage. F. Replace, or suitably repair, trees, plants and lawn areas designated to remain which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations. G. Roots 2 inches or larger that are damaged or cut during construction are to be sawed off close to the tree side of the excavation by certified arborist. H. During the leafing-out period in the spring, extra care should be exercised to reduce root damage such as keeping exposed roots wet, saturating soil when backfilling around roots, and backfilling as soon as possible. I. Consult Cornell University Grounds Department for mitigation of roof or tree damage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-7 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-8 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-9 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 2.9 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades. 3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees. 2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work. 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work. 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-10 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND CONTROLS May 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week. G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities. 2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 DOCK & MECHANCAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 DOCK & MECHANCAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows: 1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence. 2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel. F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to Install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat. G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns. H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: 1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner. 2.3 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the Work. B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES NEWMAN LAB LOADING TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 DOCK & MECHANCAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing. 1. If the Contractor elects to use the building’s permanent heating system for temporary heat, the Contractor shall provide filters with a minimum MERV of 8 at each return- air grille in system, maintain to keep them free of dust and debris, replace if necessary and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout. D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required. E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy. F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture intrusion that is detrimental to the Project. 2.4 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times. B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work. 2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction. The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services associated with such usage. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 51 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 23 Ithaca, New York HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION NEWMAN LOADING HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 01 51 23-1 DOCK & MECH MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain existing or temporary building heating systems to accomplish the following: 1. Protect the existing facility and facility plumbing systems against damage due to cold temperatures. 2. Provide sufficient heat so that the Work can be accomplished in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Maintain construction schedules as required by the Contract. B. Include in the bid price an amount necessary to provide Construction Heat as required. C. Existing central steam systems may be used to the extent that they do not interfere with the safe and effective completion of Work. However, any modifications to existing systems shall be corrected prior to the conclusion of work. D. No natural gas is available to the facility for temporary heat. E. At the conclusion of the project the facility heating systems shall be returned to functional order as necessary to protect the building and facility plumbing systems. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall include in the bid the cost of the temporary heat. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairs to the facility necessitated by the failure to provide heat during any portion of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 51 23*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION NEWMAN LAB LOADING STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution. B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds. C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION NEWMAN LAB LOADING STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus. E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work. F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment. 1.4 PALM ROAD STORAGE A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road location shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm Road storage site associated with the Contractor’s storage. C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the Palm Road site. D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found. E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally. F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents. G. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION NEWMAN LAB LOADING STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.5 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage. 2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation. e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc. 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION NEWMAN LAB LOADING STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: 1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products. 2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING NEWMAN LAB LOADING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND REPAIRING MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes. B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative. E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. F. Openings and Chases 1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING NEWMAN LAB LOADING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND REPAIRING MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of the affected work. 3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project. 5. Description of the proposed work: a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation. 7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following: a. Foundation construction CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING NEWMAN LAB LOADING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND REPAIRING MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR b. Bearing and retaining walls c. Structural concrete d. Structural steel and lintels e. Structural decking f. Miscellaneous structural metals g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports i. Equipment supports B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Air or smoke barriers c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers d. Membranes and flashings e. Fire protection systems f. Control systems g. Communication systems h. Electrical wiring systems i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING NEWMAN LAB LOADING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND REPAIRING MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner. 1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes. b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane. 2. Water Tightness a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight. b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight. c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved. B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of in- place or existing materials. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING NEWMAN LAB LOADING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND REPAIRING MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfilling. B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties. D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water. E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING NEWMAN LAB LOADING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND REPAIRING MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING NEWMAN LAB LOADING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND REPAIRING MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. 8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. 9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition. a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items. D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 5. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work. F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING NEWMAN LAB LOADING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-8 DOCK & MECHANICAL AND REPAIRING MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT NEWMAN LAB LOADING PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INSPECTIONS A. Substantial Completion: 1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. 2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete. 3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. 4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca Building Department. a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS. b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT NEWMAN LAB LOADING PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions: - Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State. - Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from the rest of the system - Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump. - A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components. - A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been modified. - A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced. - A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified - An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement. - A modification or extension of the piping for a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14. B. Final Acceptance: 1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor. 2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT NEWMAN LAB LOADING PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems. B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion. C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring. 5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. 6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT NEWMAN LAB LOADING PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning. 8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began. 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout." 3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds. B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents. B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any. 1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours. 2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty. 3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility. 4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor. 5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future warranty claims. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so. H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor. B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references. C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Item description. 3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat) 4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer? 5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number. 6. Scope. 7. Duration. a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 8. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS NEWMAN LAB LOADING WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. 3.3 ROOF WARRANTY PACKAGE A. Roof warranties shall explicitly denote the specific roof panel identification number (ROOF ID) for which the warranty applies to. B. Roof panel identification numbers shall be generated in accordance with Section 01 78 22, FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY. C. Roof warranties shall include a dimensioned roof plan with roof panel identification numbers generated in accordance with Section 01 78 22, FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY. ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR C. Drawings As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional, or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner. The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following areas of construction: 1. Architectural: a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code b. Wall, door, window locations c. Built in casework locations d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations e. Material and products where submittals are requested 2. Civil and Structural a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical b. Materials and products where submittals are requested c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems d. Site related elements including: - Building outlines, entranceways, areaways, roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data. e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction. f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems g. Geotechnical subsurface information h. Items that will require future maintenance i. Life safety critical items CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR 3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection) h. Products where submittals are requested i. Final locations of all equipment. j. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork. k. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork. l. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators. m. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers. n. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations. o. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage. 4. Electrical a. Products where submittals were requested. b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type. c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems. d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies. e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions. 5. Environmental a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure b. Storm water maintenance/testing access points c. Location of unusual excavation findings / contaminated soil (i.e. mercury uncovered during excavation, also on-site spills during construction), including quantity excavated/disposed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS NEWMAN LAB LOADING RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 DOCK & MECHANICAL MAY 22, 2019 ROOM REPAIR D. Specifications and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIR CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse or storage. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Engineering Shoring Design: Submit shoring calculations and drawings for the Project for shoring as indicated on the Drawings and stamped and signed by a New York State licensed Professional Engineer. B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of stairs and building entrances. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. <Insert items to be removed by Owner?>. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished because of building operations or processes performed there. F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following: 1. <Insert warranted system>. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Engage a professional engineer to perform shoring design for existing building elements, as indicated on Drawings, prior to demolition of structural elements. D. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs or video. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 8 hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 7 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, reinforcement to remain or be cut and removed if required to be replaced, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. D. Roofing (Waterproofing): Protect area during rain or at the end of every work day so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. 1. Remove existing waterproofing system down to substrate. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031000 - 1 SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Form-facing material for cast-in-place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchoring. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Form-Facing Material: Temporary structure or mold for the support of concrete while the concrete is setting and gaining sufficient strength to be self-supporting. B. Formwork: The total system of support of freshly placed concrete, including the mold or sheathing that contacts the concrete, as well as supporting members, hardware, and necessary bracing. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review the following: a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control. b. Construction, movement, contraction, and isolation joints c. Forms and form-removal limitations. d. Shoring procedures. e. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each of the following: 1. Exposed surface form-facing material. 2. Concealed surface form-facing material. 3. Forms for cylindrical columns. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031000 - 2 4. Pan-type forms. 5. Void forms. 6. Form liners. 7. Insulating concrete forms. 8. Form ties. 9. Waterstops. 10. Form-release agent. B. Shop Drawings: Detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of forms. 1. Indicate dimension and locations of construction and movement joints required to construct the structure in accordance with ACI 301. 2. Indicate location of waterstops. 3. Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping of forms, shoring removal. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. As-Cast Surface Form-Facing Material: 1. Provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. 2. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 3. Acceptable Materials: As required to comply with Surface Finish designations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete, and as follows: a. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Concealed Surface Form-Facing Material: Lumber, plywood, metal, plastic, or another approved material. 1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.2 WATERSTOPS A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031000 - 3 a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. b. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company. c. JP Specialties, Inc. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 2. Form release agent for form liners shall be acceptable to form liner manufacturer. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FORMWORK A. Comply with ACI 301. B. Construct formwork, so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 and to comply with the Surface Finish designations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for as-cast finishes. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities as follows: 1. Surface Finish-2.0: ACI 117 Class B, 1/4 inch. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 1. Minimize joints. 2. Exposed Concrete: Symmetrically align joints in forms. E. Construct removable forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031000 - 4 1. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. 2. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 3. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and other accessories, for easy removal. F. Do not use rust-stained, steel, form-facing material. G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. 1. Provide and secure units to support screed strips 2. Use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. 1. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 2. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. J. At construction joints, overlap forms onto previously placed concrete not less than 12 inches. K. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. 1. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. 2. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on Drawings. L. Construction and Movement Joints: 1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 2. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 3. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. a. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam- girder intersection. 5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. M. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. 1. Locate ports and openings in bottom of vertical forms, in inconspicuous location, to allow flushing water to drain. 2. Close temporary ports and openings with tight-fitting panels, flush with inside face of form, and neatly fitted, so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031000 - 5 N. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. O. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. P. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. 1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 4. Clean embedded items immediately prior to concrete placement. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WATERSTOPS A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated on Drawings, according to manufacturer's written instructions, by adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. 1. Install in longest lengths practicable. 2. Locate waterstops in center of joint unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. 3.4 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form- removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031000 - 6 1. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are unacceptable for exposed surfaces. 2. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. 1. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. 2. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Inspect formwork for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member being formed. END OF SECTION 031000 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000 - 1 SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel reinforcement bars. 2. Welded-wire reinforcement. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review the following: a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control. b. Construction contraction and isolation joints. c. Steel-reinforcement installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of steel reinforcement. 2. Epoxy repair coating. 3. Bar supports. 4. Mechanical splice couplers. B. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI SP-066: 1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths of lap splices, details of mechanical splice couplers, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000 - 2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: CRSI's "Epoxy Coating Plant Certification." B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Steel Reinforcement: 2. Mechanical splice couplers. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage, and to avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 1. Store reinforcement to avoid contact with earth. 2. Do not allow epoxy-coated reinforcement to be stored outdoors for more than 60 days without being stored under an opaque covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: 1. Steel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed bars. 2. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A934/A934M with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length. B. Epoxy-Coated Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A884/A884M, Class A coated, Type 1, plain steel. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. 1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in accordance with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: a. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use CRSI Class 1A epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. B. Mechanical Splice Couplers: ACI 318 Type 1, same material of reinforcing bar being spliced; tension-compression type. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000 - 3 C. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch in diameter. 1. Finish: ASTM A884/A884M, Class A, Type 1, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch wire length. D. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A775/A775M. 2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. 1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. C. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch, not less than one bar diameter, or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater. D. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318. E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. F. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings. 1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars shall be lapped not less than 36 bar diameters at splices, or 24 inches, whichever is greater. 2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318. 3. Mechanical Splice Couplers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths. 1. Support welded-wire reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000 - 4 a. For reinforcement less than W4.0 or D4.0, continuous support spacing shall not exceed 12 inches. 2. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one wire spacing plus 2 inches for plain wire and 8 inches for deformed wire. 3. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 4. Lace overlaps with wire. H. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Comply with ACI 117. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel-reinforcement placement. 2. Steel-reinforcement mechanical splice couplers. END OF SECTION 032000 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 031000 "Concrete Forming and Accessories" for form-facing materials, form liners, insulating concrete forms, and waterstops. 2. Section 032000 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete Subcontractor. 2. Review the following: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control. b. Construction joints, control joints, isolation joints, and joint-filler strips. c. Semirigid joint fillers. d. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances. e. Cold and hot weather concreting procedures. f. Concrete finishes and finishing. g. Curing procedures. h. Forms and form-removal limitations. i. Concrete repair procedures. j. Concrete protection. k. Initial curing and field curing of field test cylinders (ASTM C31/C31M.) 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each of the following. 1. Portland cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Aggregates. 4. Admixtures: a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials, supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing conditions, and use of other admixtures. 5. Curing materials. 6. Repair materials. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following: 1. Mixture identification. 2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength. 3. Durability exposure class. 4. Maximum w/cm. 5. Slump limit. 6. Air content. 7. Nominal maximum aggregate size. 8. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if permitted. 9. Include manufacturer's certification that permeability-reducing admixture is compatible with mix design. 10. Include certification that dosage rate for permeability-reducing admixture matches dosage rate used in performance compliance test. 11. Intended placement method. 12. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For the following: 1. Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer. B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Repair materials. C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Portland cement. 2. Fly ash. 3. Aggregates. 4. Admixtures: a. Permeability-Reducing Admixture: Include independent test reports, indicating compliance with specified requirements, including dosage rate used in test. D. Research Reports: 1. For concrete admixtures in accordance with ICC's Acceptance Criteria AC198. E. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each mix design. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Laboratory Testing Agency Qualifications: A testing agency qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated and employing an ACI-certified Concrete Quality Control Technical Manager. 1. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on each concrete mixture. 1. Include the following information in each test report: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 a. Admixture dosage rates. b. Slump. c. Air content. d. Seven-day compressive strength. e. 28-day compressive strength. f. Permeability. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows. 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F, other than reinforcing steel. 5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain all concrete mixtures from a single ready-mixed concrete manufacturer for entire Project. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 2. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant. 3. Obtain aggregate from single source. 4. Obtain each type of admixture from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I, Type II, or Type I/II, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 4. Mid-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A or Type F. Water content reduction to be greater than 7%. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. 6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II. 8. Permeability-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type S, hydrophilic, permeability-reducing crystalline admixture, capable of reducing water absorption of concrete exposed to hydrostatic pressure (PRAH). a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1) AQUAFIN, Inc. 2) Kryton International Inc. b. Permeability: No leakage when tested in accordance with U.S. Army Corps of Engineers CRC C48 at a hydraulic pressure of 200 psi for 14 days. F. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94/C94M, potable LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 2.3 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. B. Curing Paper: Eight-feet-wide paper, consisting of two layers of fibered kraft paper laminated with double coating of asphalt. C. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, shrinkage-resistant, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. B. Chemical Anchor Adhesives: Heavy duty, two component injectable adhesive designed to be dispensed using double chamber gun with mixing nozzle. Adhesives in capsule form will not be accepted. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hilti, Inc.; Hit-HY 200; Hit-Ice b. ITW Redhead; Epcon C6. c. Powers Fasteners, Inc.; AC100+ Gold. 2.5 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Mortar: One-component, polymer-modified, Portland-cement mortar for vertical and overhead surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.; MasterEmaco N 423RS. b. The Euclid Chemical Company; Eucopatch. c. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaRepair SHB. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent by mass, but if used, a minimum of 15 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use mid-range, water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, and concrete with a w/cm below 0.50. 4. Use permeability-reducing admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Normal-weight concrete used for all concrete. 1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 F3. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days. 3. Maximum w/cm: 0.40. 4. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. 5. Slump Limit: 8 inches, plus or minus 1 inch for concrete with verified slump of 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture at Project site. 6. Air Content: a. 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for concrete containing 1- inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 7. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. 8. Include permeability-reducing admixture in slab and topping mixtures at rates as recommended by manufacturer. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories, and reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections, acceptable to testing agency, including the following: 1. Daily access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including source of water and continuous electrical power at Project site during site curing period for test samples. 4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. 1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303. 3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3.4 JOINTS A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect. 2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 3. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders at third points of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 6. Roughen surface of hardened concrete, wet surface, and immediately pour fresh concrete against wet surface. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placement. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket. 1. With each concrete mixture submittal, indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Water added must not increase the water-cement ratio past the approved mix design ratio. 3. Add additional water reducer or plasticizer to mix instead of adding water to achieve flowable, workable concrete. Do not add water to concrete after adding these admixtures to mixture. 4. Do not add water after truck is more than half empty. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. 1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with ACI 301. a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence. 2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas. 6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. 8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. As-Cast Surface Finishes: 1. ACI 301Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep. b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch. c. Patch tie holes. d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class B. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: 1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 FINISHING SLABS AND TOPPINGS A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations indicated on Drawings. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 2. Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before application. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 3.8 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: 1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. 3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. 3.9 CONCRETE CURING A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing. 2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows: 1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. 2. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. 3. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period, as follows: a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final setting of concrete. b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet. c. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application; apply additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface continuously wet. d. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams. C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows: 1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. 2. Concrete Slabs and Toppings: a. Contractor has option of the following: 1) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of, the following: a) Water. b) Continuous water-fog spray. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Conform to ACI 117. 3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: 1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. 2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer’s approval. B. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. c. Clean, dampen with water. d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before surface has dried. e. Fill form-tie voids with repair mortar. 2. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. a. Correct low and high areas. b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface-finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with overlayment. a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with overlayment. a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13 b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair and primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete. c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with repair mortar. a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces. c. Place patching mortar before surface has dried. d. Compact repair mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. D. Perform structural repairs of concrete, as indicated on Drawings. E. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections and Testing: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare testing and inspection reports. 1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite samples on Site and verifying that field-cured composite samples are cured in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. 2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents. 3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests. a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M, ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test and inspection: 1) Project name. 2) Name of testing agency. 3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians performing inspections and testing. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 4) Name of concrete manufacturer. 5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing. 6) Date and time of concrete placement. 7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples. 8) Date and time sample was obtained. 9) Truck and batch ticket numbers. 10) Design compressive strength at 28 days. 11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials. 12) Field test results. 13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing, including curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial curing period. 14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and 28 days. B. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to testing agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size, design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water that can be added at Project site. C. Inspections: 1. Verification of use of required design mixture. 2. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 3. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 4. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M: a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Slump Flow: ASTM C1611/C1611M: a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15 a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M: a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M: a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of three 6-inch by 12-inch or 4-inch by 8-inch cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast, initial cure, and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. a. Test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. Retain one set of two specimens for testing at 56 days as deemed necessary by Engineer. b. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two specimens at 7 days or as agreed upon by Project team. c. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength, and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi if specified compressive strength is 5000 psi, or no compressive strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if specified compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi. 10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 11. Additional Tests: a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301 section 1.6.6.3. 12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16 13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows: 1. Protect from petroleum stains. 2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces. 3. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces. 4. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces. END OF SECTION 033000 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, and steel pipe sleeves indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Fasteners. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor slabs, decks, and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. C. Anchors, General: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329/F2329M. E. Post-Installed Anchors: chemical anchors. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. B. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 2.6 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize bearing and leveling plates. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with shrinkage-resistant grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION 055000 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 1 SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Polyurethane waterproofing. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including, but not limited to, the following: a. Surface preparation specified in other Sections. b. Minimum curing period. c. Forecasted weather conditions. d. Special details and sheet flashings. e. Repairs. f. Field quality control. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. 2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show locations and extent of waterproofing. 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 2. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer's Special Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of five years. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling waterproofing, drainage panels, and concrete topping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials and molded- sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 3 2.2 SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING A. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M and coal-tar free. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc. b. BASF Corporation. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. d. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company. e. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory-formulated. C. Membrane-Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric, manufacturer's standard weight. D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric. E. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing; ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25 or greater; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications and Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions. 1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam. F. Sheet Metal Flashing: Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, of minimum uncoated weight (thickness) indicated; coated on both sides with zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin). 1. Underlayment Materials: a. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated. b. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum. 2. Solder: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin, with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent, as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 3. Fasteners: Stainless steel concrete screws. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 4 4. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. 2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel with Polymeric Film: Composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve, laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a horizontal flow rate through the core of not less than 21 gpm per ft. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 5 3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS A. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 898/C 898M. B. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 898/C 898M. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip at least 6 inches wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat. 3.5 SHEET METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Anchor sheet metal flashing securely in place, with provisions for thermal movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing directly on cementitious substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. 1. Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 2. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 6 C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not pre-tin zinc-tin alloy-coated copper. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. D. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 3.6 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 898/C 898M. B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. C. Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. D. Reinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other suitable application method. 1. Apply first coat of waterproofing, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply second coat of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a seamless reinforced membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with an average dry film total thickness of 120 mils. 2. Apply reinforced waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.. E. Cure waterproofing, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application and curing. F. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. For horizontal applications, install protection course loose laid over fully cured membrane. 2. For vertical applications, set protection course in nominally cured membrane, which will act as an adhesive. If membrane cures before application of protection course, use adhesive. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 7 3. Molded-sheet drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course for vertical applications when approved in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.7 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or another method that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections: 1. Testing agency shall verify thickness of waterproofing during application for each 100 sq. ft. of installed waterproofing or part thereof. 2. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to procedures in ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before placing overlaying construction. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. a. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and a maximum depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of sheet flashings. b. Flood each area for 48 hours. c. Testing agency shall observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing. d. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until waterproofing installation is watertight. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components and to furnish reports to Engineer. C. Waterproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 8 D. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. END OF SECTION 071416 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1 SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems. 1. Exterior Steel Substrates: 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying high performance coatings specified in this Section, who has successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; familiar with special requirements indicated; and with sufficient trained staff to apply manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 2 B. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Owner will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system. a. Provide mockup of at least 10 sq. ft. for paint system sample. b. Provide sample of surface prep at one corroded railing post base. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Engineer at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Tnemec Company, Inc. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in the Exterior High-Performance Coating Schedule for the coating category indicated. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 3 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. C. Colors: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. Pressure wash with a bio-degradable detergent and water at 3,000 psi at 7 gallons per minute to remove all chalk, dust dirt and soluble contaminants. Scrubbing may be necessary to achieve complete removal. Rinse with fresh water. All loose coatings must be removed. 2. Remove all rust according to SSPC-SP6, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”. Remove all existing coatings to bare metal in areas noted and full length and surface area of all members noted. Feather into edges of any remaining tightly adhered coatings. All surfaces to be clean and dry. E. New Structural Steel (unprimed): 1. After field welding is complete, remove all rust according to SSPC-SP6, “Commercial Blast Cleaning” to bare metal. All surfaces to be clean and dry. F. Apply prime coat within 8 hours of surface preparation or before surface re-rusts. If rust forms prior to priming, remove per surface preparation requirements. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 5 4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Construction Testing and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following: 1. Periodic surface preparation quality control inspection. 2. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. a. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. b. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Paint Manufacturer Representative Inspection: A representative from Righter Group, Inc. to visit Project site during the beginning of the surface preparation portion of the Project. This representative to inspect the surface preparation workmanship and mockups. Representative to determine if correct procedures are being followed. Engineer and Owner representative to be present at time of inspection. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 6 E. Repainting: Touch up or repaint, as required by the Owner, all painted surfaces that are marred, marked, chipped, spalled, defaced, or deficient in any way before it is turned over to the Owner. F. Touchup Painting: Clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up surfaces and according to same preparation specified for that surface. Coat with the same coating material specified. 3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Pigmented Polyurethane over High-Build Epoxy System: a. Prime Coat (for all bare metal surfaces): Primer, epoxy, abrasion-resistant, anti- corrosive, chemical resistant. 1) Tnemec, Inc,; Series 135 Chembuild at dry film thickness of 4 - 6 mils. b. Intermediate Coat (over tightly adhered existing coatings, spot primed areas, and over all new prime coat): Polyamidamine epoxy. 1) Tnemec, Inc,; Series N69 Epoxoline at dry film thickness of 3 - 4 mils. c. Topcoat (finish coat over all surfaces): Aliphatic Polyester Polyurethane. 1) Tnemec, Inc,; Series 290 CRU at dry film thickness of 2 - 3 mils. d. Complete Coating System: Total dry film thickness (over bare steel) at dry film thickness of 9 – 13 mils. END OF SECTION 099600 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1 SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. W elding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural-Steel W elding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AW S D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural W elding Code - Steel." B. Pipe W elding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-galvanized. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 2 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts. 2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated, pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips. 4. Channel W idth: Selected for applicable load criteria. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90. B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated, pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips. 4. Channel W idth: Select for applicable load criteria. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90. 2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Buckaroos, Inc. 2. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 3. Pipe Shields Inc. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psi minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 3 C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: W here not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus [200 lb] <Insert value>. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. W eld steel according to AW S D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled strut systems. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 4 D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. J. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 5 c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field W elding: Comply with AW S D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 6 F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. W elded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I- beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I- beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. W elded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 7 J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. L. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 230529 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1 SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C547. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ. 3. 850 deg F. 4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 3 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. C. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire- resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation. 2. Service Temperature Range: 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: W hite. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Joint Sealants: 1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F. b. Color: W hite or gray. 2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. W hen factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: W hite, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 4 2.8 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: W hite vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. 2. W idth: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 5 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. W here vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 6 a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. W here vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints. 3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels. 5. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 7 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. W here vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. W hen preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3.7 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 8 3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Chilled W ater: 1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick. END OF SECTION 230719 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts. 3. Section 233119 "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment. 4. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (State of California). 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Sealants and gaskets. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Fittings. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 4. Seam and joint construction. 5. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible". B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup." D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." E. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness. 2.2 SINGLE-W ALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1. 2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T- 24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SINGLE-W ALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt- welded longitudinal seams. D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. W here black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch-minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch- minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: W oven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 3 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. W ater resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel C. W ater-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. W ater resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10 inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings. B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints. D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation. H. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit. 1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes. 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger. I. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTW ORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. W hen welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. W here practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as indicated below. B. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. C. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. END OF SECTION 233113 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Flange connectors. 3. Duct-mounted access doors. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of W arm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to the following: a. Nailor Industries Inc. b. Pottorff. c. Ruskin Company. 2. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 3. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 4. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 5. Frames: a. Angle shaped. b. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. c. Mitered and welded corners. d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 6. Blades: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick. 7. Blade Axles: Nonferrous metal. 8. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 9. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 10. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum. 11. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 12. Accessories: a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. 13. Size: 0.5-inch diameter. 14. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 15. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly. B. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to the following: 1. CL W ARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hardcast, Inc. B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gauge and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4 2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to the following: 1. CL W ARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Pottorff. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the W ork include, but are not limited to the following: 1. CL W ARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Duro Dyne Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum W eight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDW ARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. W here dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. D. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. E. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. F. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. G. Access Door Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. H. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2190850 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6 I. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. J. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. END OF SECTION 233300 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Fire-alarm wire and cable. 3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 601 to 35,000 V. 2. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables. 3. Section 271313 "Communications Copper Backbone Cabling" for twisted pair cabling used for data circuits. 4. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for twisted pair cabling used for data circuits. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For. B. Field quality-control reports. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Belden Inc. 2. Cerro Wire LLC. 3. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 4. Okonite Company (The). 5. Southwire Company. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type NM: Comply with UL 83 and UL 719. 2. Type RHH and Type RHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 3. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854. 4. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 5. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 6. Type THW and Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83. 7. Type UF: Comply with UL 83 and UL 493. 8. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 9. . F. Shield: 1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 2.2 FIRE-ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Wire & Cable Inc. 2. West Penn Wire. B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760. C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 16 AWG. 1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire-alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a two-hour rating. D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a two-hour rating. 1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum, in pathway. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum, in pathway. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire-alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated. 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. ILSCO. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Copper. 2. Type: Two hole with standard barrels. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 3. Termination: Compression. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger. E. VFC Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes. F. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller. G. PV Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC, limited to 10’ in length. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless- steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIRE-ALARM WIRING A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal pathway according to Section 270528.29 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems." 1. Install plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Fire-alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated pathway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable. C. Wiring Method: 1. Cables and pathways used for fire-alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with fire-alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. 2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of two-hour, fire-rated fire-alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted. 3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire-alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or pathway as signaling line circuits. D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire-alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 6 E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; cabinets; or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire-alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color- code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire-alarm system junction boxes and covers red. G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire-alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones. H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire-alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. D. Comply with requirements in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.7 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 7 3.8 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements: a. . 3. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests: a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram. b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following: 1) A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench. 3) Thermographic survey. c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition. f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration. g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable. h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors. 4. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 5. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 8 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 260519 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 ECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Foundation steel electrodes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. ERICO; a brand of nVent. 3. ILSCO. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 5. Siemens Industry, Inc., Energy Management Division. 6. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 4. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. C. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. D. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. E. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron. F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. H. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. I. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, aluminum terminal with set screw. J. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections. K. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw. L. Straps: Solid copper, cast-bronze clamp. Rated for 600 A. M. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal one-piece clamp. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 N. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial. O. Water Pipe Clamps: 1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts. a. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. b. Listed for direct burial. 2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector. 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet. B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts. 1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches long. 2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material. C. Ground Plates: 1/4 inch thick, hot-dip galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation. C. Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. D. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with more than one continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. E. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus. F. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses. 3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator. 3.4 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. 3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. B. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. C. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. Use exothermic welds for all below-grade connections. 3. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 6 G. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 7 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. 7. ohms. F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Aluminum slotted support systems. 3. Conduit and cable support devices. 4. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods. 5. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories. b. Clamps. c. Hangers. d. Sockets. e. Eye nuts. f. Fasteners. g. Anchors. h. Saddles. i. Brackets. 2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. CADDY; a brand of nVent. d. G-Strut. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. f. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel. 4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4. 6. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Aluminum Slotted Support Systems: Extruded-aluminum channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. c. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Channel Material: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. 4. Fittings and Accessories Material: 5052-H32 aluminum alloy. 5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. 7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) B-line, an Eaton business. 2) Hilti, Inc. 2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM F 3125/F 3125M, Grade A325. 5. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101 3. NECA 102. B. Comply with code requirements for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies. C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT IMC and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5 B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Touchup paint field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. END OF SECTION 260529 LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Metal Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. FSR Inc. c. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. d. Republic Conduit. e. Southwire Company. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. g. Wheatland Tube Company. 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated. a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. 8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. B. Metal Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. FSR Inc. c. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. d. Republic Conduit. e. Southwire Company. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. g. Wheatland Tube Company. 2. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 3. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 4. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 5. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 6. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew or compression. 7. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 8. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Nonmetallic Conduit: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. RACO; Hubbell. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Fiberglass: a. Comply with NEMA TC 14. b. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways. c. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways. 4. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. 5. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 6. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. B. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. RACO; Hubbell. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 3. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. a. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 4. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman; a brand of nVent. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. FSR Inc. 4. Hoffman; a brand of nVent. 5. Hubbell Incorporated. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 7. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 8. MonoSystems, Inc. 9. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 10. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 11. RACO; Hubbell. 12. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 13. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 14. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 15. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 J. Gangable boxes are allowed. K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. b. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. 2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Gymnasiums. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7 C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment. D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. K. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. L. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. M. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, before rising above floor. N. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. O. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. P. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8 Q. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. R. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. S. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. T. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. U. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. V. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. W. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. X. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. Y. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. 5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Z. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. AA. Expansion-Joint Fittings: LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. e. . 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. BB. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 36 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. CC. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. DD. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. EE. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. FF. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. GG. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. HH. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. II. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. LaBella Associates, D.P.C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY April 2019 Project No. 2170614 Newman Floyd Laboratory Loading Dock and Mechanical Room Structural Repairs RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 10 JJ. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, 36" below grade. E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install 0sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 5/22/2019 9:55:20 Al KEYED NOTES: TEMPORARILY REMOVE EXISTING CONDUIT AND RE -WORK ACTIVE CIRCUITS -IQ FACILITATE STRUCTURAL WORK. EXTEND, RE -CONNECT AND RE -INSTALL AFTER STRUCTURAL WORK IS COMPLETE. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT FOR LOOSE CABLES DURING WORK AND RE -ATTACH AT COMPLETION 0 REMOVE AND REPLACE CORRODED CONDUIT, DISCONNECT WIRING AND SPLICE AS REQUIRED TO FESTORE ACTIVE OIRCUITS. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT FUR (2) 4CONDUITS DURING REPLACEMENT OF STRUCTURAL SLAB. AFTER COMPLETION OF SLAB ABOVE, REATTACH IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC AND CORNELL REQUIREMENTS. (") REMOVE EXISTINC LIGHT FIXTURE AND WIRING BACK TO SOURSE, REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE TO FACILITATE STRUCTURAL REPAIRS SAVE WIRING, PROVIDE NEW LIGHT FIXTURE 1 OMAX # GILLED 1521:4K46-9-F4R-HE, EXTEND WIRING AND CONNECT AFTER STRUCTURAL WORK IS COMPLETE. PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN E101,y 1/4 = 1-0" 0' Z 4' 8' iii111)11,1ift LaBella Powered by partnership. 105 N. Toga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation ''altered by" Followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. CO 2018 LaBelle Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: I DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: MPS RDH ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 05/22/19 DRAWING NAME: PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN DRAWING NUMBER: E101 5/22/2019 10:42:23 AM EXly .I. NO EXHAUST INLET FLEX DUCT EXISTING EXHAUST I',I".A'E_ PLENUM ENTALLEO DUCTWORK EXISTING >il' AUS FAN NEW FLEX DUCT CONNECTION DUCT SUPPORTED ON BOTH SIDES FLEX CONNECTION DETAIL M1o1 NOT TO SCALE BEAM CLAMP RECTANGULAR DUCT STRUCTURAL BEAM 1/2" HANGER RODS 3"x3°x1/4" /ANGLE TRAPEZE (AS REQUIRED) CEILING 1 THREADED CONCRETE ROD HANGER EXISTING DUCT, RE -INSTALLED \-DOUBLEJAM NUT (TYP.) NOTES: 1. MAXIMUM LOAD PER HANGER ASSEMBLY = 750 POUNDS. 2. LOCATE HANGERS AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK. 3. PROVIDE EXTERNAL VIBRATION ISOLATORS ONLY IF EQUIPMENT HAS NOT BEEN POVIDED WITH INTERNAL VIBRATION ISOLATION. 4. PROVIDE TRAPEZE ONLY IF EQUIPMENT DOES NOT COME WITH ATTACHED HANGER CONNECTION BRACKETS 5. TRAPEZE TO BE 1-5/8" CHANNEL, 12 GAUGE, SIMILAR TO UNISTRUT P5500, 3 RECTANGULAR DUCT SUPPORT DETAIL \ X1101 NOT TO SCALE REPLACE AND REPAIR DAMAGED INSULATION AND VAPOR BARRIER INSULATION SHIELD 6" MIN. LENGTH CONNECT TO CONCRETE CEILING ABOVE NEW CLEVIS HANGER ALL THREAD ROD NUT (TOP & BOTTOM) WASHER (TOP & BOTTOM) NOTES: 1. PROVIDE TEMP, SUPPORT AND PROTECTION OF EXISTING PIPING DURING STRUCTURAL WORK. PIPE - PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL NEW CLEVIS HANGER NEW INSULATION EXISTING PIPE HIGH DENSITY INSULATION INSERT INSULATION PROTECTIVE SHEETMETAL SHIELD i\A1oi NOT TO SCALE EXISTING WALL LOUVER TO REMAIN O©� EXISTING EXHAUST AIR PLENUM O©. M101 - KEYED NOTES TEMPORARILY SUPPORT EXISTING CHW PIPING FROM SLAB BELOW AND REMOVE OVERHEAD SUPPORT AS NECESSARY FOR STRUCTURAL WORK. CAREFULLY DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DUCTAS NECESSARY FOR STRUCTURAL WORK. HOLD ON SITE FOR RECONNECTION. FOLLOWING STRUCTURAL WORK, REHANG CHW PIPING FROM ABOVE WITH CLEVIS HANGERS AND INSULATION INSERTS. REPLACE DAMAGED INSULATION. APPLY VAPOR BARRIER MASTIC TO INSULATION JOINTS. REINSTALL EXISTING DUCT FOLLOWING STRUCTURAL WORK. RE -SUPPORT FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE. REPLACE DAMAGED DUCT WITH NEW. PROVIDE NEW FLEX CONNECTIONS AT FAN DISCHARGE CONNECTION. EXISTING SHOP EXHAUST GRILLE TO REMAIN EXISTING EXHAUST FAN TO REMAIN— EXISTING CHWS/R PIPING TO REMAIN EXISTING EXHAUST DUCT FROM EF -8 TO REMAIN n Ell rTh BASEMENT MECHANICAL PLAN 00 00 EXISTING WALL MOUNTED PIPE SUPPORT, CLOSE TO STRUCTURE M101 / 1/4" = 1'-0 LaBetia Powered by partnership, 105 N. Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation "altered by" followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. © 2018 LaBella Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: ZAZ EJL ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 5/22/19 DRAWING NAME: BASEMENT MECHANICAL PLAN DRAWING NUMBER: M1 01 5/22/2019 10:42:23 AM GENERAL NOTES DRAWING SYMBOLS DUCTWORK GENERAL NOTES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 THE GENERAL SCOPE OF THIS PROJECT IS TO CAREFULLY REMOVE EXISTING DUCT AS NECESSARY TO SUPPORT STRUCTURAL WORK ABOVE. HOLD EXISTING DUCT ON SITE AND REINSTALL, PROVIDING NEW DUCT, FITTINGS & CONNECTIONS AS NECESSARY FOLLOWING STRUCTURAL WORK. PROVIDE PROTECTION TO EXISTING FAN FROM DUST OR PHYSICAL DAMAGE DURING CONTRUCTION. COORDINATE HVAC INSTALLATION WITH STRUCTURE, CEILING, LIGHTING, CONDUIT, HEATING AND DOMESTIC PIPING, STORM AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING (ALL TRADES). INSULATE OR LINE DUCTWORK AS SPECIFIED IN THE MECHANICAL INSULATION AND METAL DUCTS SPECIFICATIONS OR NOTED ON DRAWINGS. NOTE THAT DUCT SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE INSIDE NET CLEAR DIMENSIONS. ALL 90 DEGREE RECTANGULAR ELBOWS AND DUCTWORK TEES SHALL BE HARD MITERED WITH FACTORY TURNING VANES. TURNING VANES SHALL BE OMITTED FROM AIR TRANSFER DUCT ELBOWS. ALL DUCTWORK PASSING THROUGH NON -FIRE RATED WALLS TO BE SEALED AROUND PERIMETER (BOTH SIDES) WITH DRYWALL JOINT COMPOUND OR APPROVED EQUAL, ENGAGE AND COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL FOR REQUIRED LOCK -OUT AND TAG -OUT OF EXISTING EXHAUST FAN PRIOR TO WORK. COORDINATE SHUT DOWN OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT W/ CAMPUS 2 WEEKS PRIOR TO WORK. ALL SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED DISTRIBUTION SERVICES SHALL BE DESIGNED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. THE DISCIPLINE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE STRUCTURAL STEEL WHERE REQUIRED IN ORDER TO SUPPORT EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED DISTRIBUTION SERVICES WHERE THE BUILDING STRUCTURE SPACING IS TOO GREAT TO ALLOW DIRECT SUPPORT. THE DISCIPLINE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CONFIRMATION OF ALL SUPPORTS AND SHALL OBTAIN THE PROFESSIONAL SERVICE OF A STRUCTURAL ENGINEER LICENSED IN THE STATE OF NEW YORK AND FURNISH SEALED DRAWINGS AND DETAILS ILLUSTRATING SUCH SUPPORTS AND COMPLIANCE METHODS. THE ABOVE GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL HVAC CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT DRAWINGS. PIPING GENERAL NOTES 1 2 3 COORDINATE SUPPORT OF HVAC PIPING WITH DUCTWORK, STRUCTURE, CEILING, LIGHTING, CONDUIT, HEATING AND DOMESTIC PIPING, STORM AND SANITARY DRAIN PIPING (ALL TRADES). THE GENERAL SCOPE OF THIS PROJECT IS TO TEMPORARILY SUPPORT & PROTECT EXISTING PIPING TO SUPPORT STRUCTURAL WORK ABOVE. REPLACE INSULATION WHERE NECESSARY AND AT NEW HANGER LOCATIONS FROM NEW STRUCTURE ABOVE. THE ABOVE GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ALL HVAC CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT DRAWINGS, CA COMPRESSED AIR CD CONDENSATE DRAIN GHR GLYCOL HOT WATER RETURN GHS GLYCOL HOT WATER SUPPLY HWR CHILLED WATER RETURN HWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY C CONDENSATE CTR COOLING TOWER RETURN CTS COOLING TOWER SUPPLY DIRECTION OF FLOW DN RHL RL RS SV DIRECTION OF PITCH REFRIGERANT H/L PRESSURE REFRIGERANT LIQUID REFRIGERANT SUCTION STEAM VENT 11 11 I -t HPLR HPLS HPC HPS MPC MPS LPC LPS HWR HWS MU NG PC VAC IW 0 3 7 C HEAT PUMP LOOP RETURN HEAT PUMP LOOP SUPPLY HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE HIGH PRESSURE STEAM MEDIUM PRESSURE CONDENSATE MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE LOW PRESSURE STEAM HOT WATER RETURN HOT WATER SUPPLY MAKE-UP WATER NATURAL GAS PUMPED CONDENSATE VACUUM INDIRECT WASTE EXISTING DUCTWORK, PIPE, EQUIPMENT NEW DUCTWORK, PIPE, EQUIPMENT — DUCTWORK, PIPE, EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED PIPE TURNED UP PIPE TURNED DOWN BRANCH OFF TOP OF PIPE BRANCH OFF BOTTOM OF PIPE REDUCER PIPE BREAK EEtm ll — x —0- - BALL VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE GATE VALVE SHUT OFF VALVE (GATE, BALL, OR BUTTERFLY - REFER TO SPECS) CHECK VALVE BALANCE VALVE ANGLE VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE STEAM TRAP MOTOR OR SOLENOID CONTROL VALVE MOTOR OR SOLENOID CONTROL VALVE (3 -WAY) TRIPLE DUTY VALVE RELIEF VALVE STRAINER UNION PRESSURE GAUGE PUMP EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED VRF FAN COIL CASSETTE UNIT 8 18/8 14"0 18/8 REMOVE TO THIS POINT) NEW CONNECTION TO EXISTING SECTION CALLOUT DETAIL NUMBER DEMOLITION KEYNOTE KEYNOTE RETURN AIR SUPPLY AIR DUCT (DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN DUCT. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.) DUCT (DIMENSIONS SHOWN BY LEADER. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.) FLEX DUCT DUCT SECTION - SUPPLY AIR DUCT SECTION - EXHAUST AIR DUCT SECTION - RETURN AIR VOLUME DAMPER 14" ROUND DUCT 18" x 8" FLAT OVAL DUCT NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS MAY APPLY TO THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT. ANY ADDITIONS OR OMISSIONS FROM THIS LEGEND SHEET DOES NOT IMPLY INCLUSION AND/ OR EXCLUSIONS OF ANY PARTICULAR ITEM FROM THIS PROJECT. 18/8 SDI 1 IAD F/S\ IAD 0 a O CO2 INSULATED DUCT (DIM. IS INTERNAL) MITERED ELBOW W/ TURNING VANES WALL OR DUCT MOUNTED SUPPLY GRILLE WALL OR DUCT MOUNTED RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLE FIRE DAMPER ACCESS DOOR TO BE LOCATED ON MOST ACCESSIBLE SIDE OF DUCT SMOKE DAMPER ACCESS DOOR TO BE LOCATED ON MOST ACCESSIBLE SIDE OF DUCT COMBINATION FIRE / SMOKE DAMPER ACCESS DOOR TO BE LOCATED ON MOST ACCESSIBLE SIDE OF DUCT MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER THERMOSTAT SENSOR HUMIDISTAT CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR EXHAUST GRILLE SUPPLY DIFFUSER RETURN GRILLE REGISTER OR GRILLE - TOP NUMBER REPRESENTS TAG, SEE SCHEDULE; BOTTOM NUMBER REPRESENTS CFM. DIFFUSER - LETTER REPRESENTS TAG, SEE SCHEDULE; NUMBER REPRESENTS CFM APPLICABLE CODES EQUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS ABBREVIATIONS 1 BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE 2 ENERGY CODE OF NEW YORK STATE 3 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE 4 FIRE CODE OF NEW YORK STATE 5 PLUMBING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE 6 ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE OF NEW YORK STATE 7 ACCESSIBLE AND USABLE BUILDING AND FACILITIES-CABO/ANSI A117.1 8 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE 9 NATIONAL FIRE CODE NFPA 13 ACU AHU AD AS BDD B CA CAV CC CFP CH CHP CP CRAC CRU CT CU CUH CV DHW EF ET FCU FP FT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT AIR HANDLING UNIT ACCESS DOOR AIR SEPARATOR BACK DRAFT DAMPER BOILER AIR COMPRESSOR CONSTANT AIR VOLUME BOX COOLING COIL CHEMICAL FEED PUMP CHILLER CHILLED WATER PUMP CONDENSATE PUMP COMPUTER ROOM UNIT CONDENSATE RETURN UNIT COOLING TOWER CONDENSING UNIT CABINET UNIT HEATER CONTROL VALVE DOMESTIC WATER HEATER EXHAUST FAN EXPANSION TANK FAN COIL UNIT FIRE PUMP FINNED TUBE HC HP HU HWP HX L MAU MD P PHC PPU PRG PRV R RCP RTU UH UV VAV VD VFD WS HEATING COIL HEAT PUMP HUMIDIFIER HOT WATER PUMP HEAT EXCHANGER LOUVER MAKE UP AIR UNITS MOTORIZED DAMPER PUMP PREHEAT COIL PUMPING PACKAGED UNIT GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE REGISTER RADIANT CEILING PANEL ROOF TOP UNIT UNIT HEATER UNIT VENTILATOR VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX VOLUME DAMPER VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE WATER SOFTENER NOTE: SOME ABBREVIATIONS MAY NOT BE USED ON DRAWINGS AC ADJ AFF AFG ALT AMB AMP ANSI APPROX AVG BFP BHP BLDG BO BSMT BTU BV CAP CIP CLG CLR CO COL CONN CONC CONT CU FT CV DCDA DCV DCW DEMO DHW DIA DIP DWH DWV DWG (E) ENGR EQ EST ETR EWH EWT EX EXIST EXP EXT PERCENT ALTERNATING CURRENT ADJACENT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ABOVE FINISHED GRADE ALTERNATE AMBIENT AMPERE (AMP,AMPS) AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD INSTITUTE APPORXIAMTE (LY) AVERAGE BACKFLOW PREVENTER BRAKE HORSEPOWER BUILDING BOTTOM OF BASEMENT BRITISH THERMAL UNIT BALANCING VALVE CAPACITY CAST IRON PIPE CEILING CLEAR CLEANOUT or CARBON MONOXIDE COLUMN CONNECTION CONCRETE CONTINUOUS CUBIC FEET VALVE FLOW COEFFICIENT DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR ASSEMBLY DETECTOR CHECK VALVE DOMESTIC COLD WATER DEMOLISH or DEMOLITION DOMESTIC HOT WATER DIAMETER DUCTILE IRON PIPE DOMESTIC WATER HEATER DRAIN, WASTE, & VENT DRAWING EXISTING ENGINEER EQUAL ESTIMATED EXISTING TO REMAIN ELECTRIC WATER HEATER ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE EXISTING EXISTING EXPANSION EXTERIOR DEGREES FAHRENHEIT FA FIN FL FLA FPM FPS FT FUT GA GAL GC GPM GPD GPH HD HG HORIZ HP HPC HPS HR HVAC HZ ID IN INSUL INT IPS INV KW KWH LBS LF LG LOC LPC LPS LRA LWT MATL MAX MBH MECH MFG MIN MISC MOCP MPC MPS MTG N/A NC FREE AREA FINISHED FLOOR FULL LOAD AMPS FEET PER MINUTE FEET PER SECOND FOOT OR FEET FUTURE GAGE OR GAUGE GALLONS GENERAL CONTRACTOR GALLONS PER MINUTE GALLONS PER DAY GALLONS PER HOUR HEAD MERCURY HORIZONTAL HORSEPOWER HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE HIGH PRESSURE STEAM HOUR NIC NO NPT NRS NTS OC OD OS&Y PC PLBG PH PRESS PSF PSI PSIG PRV RCVR RECIRC RHW RO RPDA HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING RPM FREQUENCY DIAMTER, INSIDE INCH INSULATION INTERIOR IRON PIPE SIZE INVERT KILOWATT KILOWATT HOUR POUNDS LINEAR FEET LENGTH LOCATION LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE LOW PRESSURE STEAM LOCKED ROTOR AMPS LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE MATERIAL MAXIMUM BTU PER HOUR (THOUSAND) MECHANICAL MANUFACTURER MINIMUM MISCELLANEOUS MAXIMUM OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MEDIUM PRESSURE CONDENSATE MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM MOUNTING NOT APPLICABLE NORMALLY CLOSED NOTE: SOME ABBREVIATIONS MAY NOT BE USED ON DRAWINGS RPZ SCH SPEC SPLY SQ SQ FT SQ IN STD SUCT T'STAT TBD TC TD TEMP TMV TO TYP V VAC VAR VEL VIF VOL W W/ W/0 WCO WHA WM WPD WT WWP NOT IN CONTRACT NORMALLY OPEN NATIONAL PIPE TREAD NON -RISING STEM NOT TO SCALE ON CENTER DIAMETER, OUTSIDE OUTSIDE SCREW AND YOKE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PLUMBING PHASE (ELECTRICAL) PRESSURE POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PSI GUAGE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE RECEIVER RECIRCULATE HOT WATER RE -CIRCULATION ROUGH OPENING REDUCED -PRESSURE DETECTOR ASSY. REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE REDUCED -PRESSURE ZONE STEAM CAPTURE HOOD SPECIFICATION SUPPLY SQUARE SQUARE FOOT (FEET) SQUARE INCH (INCHES) STANDARD SUCTION THERMOSTAT TO BE DETERMINED TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE TEMPERATURE THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE TOP OF TYPICAL VOLT VACUUM VARIABLE VELOCITY VERIFY IN FIELD VOLUME WATT WITH WITH OUT WALL CLEANOUT WATER HAMMER ARRESTER WATER METER WATER PRESSURE DROP WEIGHT WORKING WATER PRESSURE LaBetia Powered by partnership, 105 N. Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation "altered by" followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. © 2018 LaBella Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: ZAZ EJL ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 5/22/19 DRAWING NAME: MECHANICAL LEGEND SHEET DRAWING NUMBER: M001 5/22/2019 12:02:36 PM C:\Users\MMcCarty\documents\Revit Local Files\2190850 - STR - Newman Floyd Lab Struct.Rep 2019_mmcc KEYED NOTES: SEE PLAN & ELEVATIONS FOR APPROXIMATE QUANTITY OF REPAIR #1 CONCRETE CRACK, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES, NOTE 6. #2 SHALLOW CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES #3 DEEP CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME FULL DEPTH OF MEMBER, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES. 3 SWITCHGEAR ROOM ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AT EAST WALL S202 / 1" = 10'-0" EXIST LOADING DOCK BUMPER EXIST STEEL RAILING, PREP SURFACE AND PAINT PER DIV 09 SPEC EXIST 6" CONC SLAB #2 40SF aC EXIST CONC STAIRS ( LOADING DOCK STAIRS - EAST ELEVATION 202 / 3/4" =t-0" FOLD AND SOLDER FLASHING AT TOP OF CONC WALL REMAINING AROUND RAILING POSTS FOR CONTINUOUS END DAMS (3 SIDES), PROVIDE SEALANT AT TOP, TYP 6" MIN 3' - 0" +/- TYP TYP REMOVE TOP OF WALL, REPLACE W/NEW TOPPING SEE PLAN AND DETAIL EXIST STEEL RAILING, PREP SURFACE AND PAINT PER DIV 09 SPEC EXIST 1 1/2" DIA SLAB DRAINAGE PIPE (THROUGH WALL) REMOVE PIPE AND PLUG HOLES IN WALL WITH NON -SHRINK GROUT 111 Ill I1 CONTINUOUS SHEET METAL FLASHING (SEE WATERPROOFING SPEC) W/DRIP EDGE AND HEMMED EDGES, TYP, SEE DETAIL 25SF III EXIST 1 1/2" DIA SLAB DRAINAGE HPE (THROUGH WALL)REMOVE PIPE AND PLUG HOLES IN WALL WITH NON -SHRINK GROUT 1 LOADING DOCK - EAST ELEVATION K 202 / 3/4" = 1 -0° 1 II II I I 11 I 1 in EXIST LOADING DOCK BUMPER LaBetia Powered by partnership. 105 N. Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation "altered by" followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. © 2018 LaBella Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: MCRB MCM ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 5/22/19 DRAWING NAME: LOADING DOCK ELEVATIONS DRAWING NUMBER: S202 5/22/2019 12:02:36 PM C:\Users\MMcCarty\Documents\Revit Local Files\2190850 - STR - Newman Floyd Lab Struct.Rep 2019_mmcc KEYED NOTES: SEE PLAN & ELEVATIONS FOR APPROXIMATE QUANTITY OF REPAIR #1 CONCRETE CRACK, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES, NOTE 6. #2 SHALLOW CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES #3 DEEP CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME FULL DEPTH OF MEMBER, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES. REINFORCING LAP SPLICE SCHEDULE BAR SIZE LAP SPLICE LENGTHS (IN.) #3 15 #4 19 #5 24 #6 29 #7 42 #8 48 #9 54 #10 61 #11 67 DRILL EXIST CONC AND ANCHOR W/ CHEMICAL ADHESIVE, EMBED 2 3/8" 7 4" CONC TOPPING, SEE PLAN EXIST BM WIDTH EXIST BM DEPTH 1 1/4" CHAMFER, MATCH EXIST, TYP EXIST CONC WALL EXIST 8" SLAB REMOVE AND REPLACE HATCHED AREA OF BEAM, SEE PLAN AND ELEV FOR MIN EXTENTS CONT. HORIZ BOT BARS, V.I.F. REPLACE AS REQD PER CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES --- #3 @ 12 STIRRUPS (NEW), IF EXIST STIRRUPS ARE FOUND REPLACE AS REQD PER NOTES NOTES: 1. REMOVE EXIST CONC TO MIN EXTENTS AS SHOWN ON PLAN AND TO POINT WHERE CONCRETE IS SOUND AND REINFORCING IS 80 PERCENT OF CROSS SECTIONAL AREA INTACT, LAP SPLICE NEW REINF PER SCHEDULE OR PROVIDE MECHANICAL COUPLERS PER SPEC, CONTRACTOR'S OPTION 2. EXIST REINF TO BE VERIFIED IN FIELD 3. SHORE SUPPORTED SLAB OR WALL AS NOTED ON PLANS PRIOR TO STARTING DEMOLITION 71 CONCRETE BEAM REPAIR SECTION AT SWITCHGEAR ROOM 1 1/2" = 1'-0" BASEMENT SPACE INSIDE BUILDING AL BASEMENT FLOO__ R_ (SEE PLAN) EXIST METAL GRATING AT WALKWAY EXIST STEEL ANGLE EXIST CONC WALL EXIST OVERHEAD DOOR REPAIR TOP OF WALL, SEE PLAN RESUPPORT CHANNEL BEAM, SEE PLAN DRILL EXIST CONC AND ANCHOR W/ CHEMICAL ADHESIVE, EMBED 2 3/8" EXIST BM WIDTH NEW 5" SLAB SEE PLAN EXIST 6" SLAB REMOVE AND REPLACE HATCHED AREA OF BEAM, SEE PLAN AND ELEV FOR MIN EXTENTS EXIST (4) #9 BARS, V.I.F., REPLACE AS READ, SEE NOTES #3 @ 12 STIRRUPS (NEW), IF EXIST STIRRUPS ARE FOUND REPLACE AS REQD PER NOTES 1" CHAMFER MATCH EXIST, TYP NOTES: 1. REMOVE EXIST CONC TO MIN EXTENTS AS SHOWN ON PLAN AND TO POINT WHERE CONCRETE IS SOUND AND REINFORCING IS 80 PERCENT OF CROSS SECTIONAL AREA INTACT, LAP SPLICE NEW REINF PER SCHEDULE OR PROVIDE MECHANICAL COUPLERS PER SPEC, CONTRACTOR'S OPTION 2. EXIST REINF TO BE VERIFIED IN FIELD 3. SHORE SUPPORTED SLAB OR WALL AS NOTED ON PLANS PRIOR TO STARTING DEMOLITION 6CONCRETE BEAM REPAIR SECTION AT MECH ROOM s2o1 ) 1 1/2" = 1-0" T.O. LOADING DOCK (SEE PLAN) 6 S201 REPAIR EXTENTS, SEE PLAN, TO BE VERIFIED AFTER DEMOLITION CONC BM REINF, SEE SECTION ---------------- EXIST CONC SLAB CONC BM, SEE PLAN -5-,CONCRETE BEAM REPAIR AT MECH ROOM S201 / 3/4" = 1'-0" NEW WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AND DRAINAGE PANEL T.O. LOADING DOCK (SEE PLAN) EXIST CONC SLAB, SEE PLAN I , .r' CONC TOPPING, SEE PLAN 2'-4" TOP LONGITUDINAL BARS, SEE SCHED SEE WATERPROOFING DETAILS FOR TERMINATION 2 REPAIR CONC BM, SEE PLAN EXIST 1' - O" CONC WALL dCC -� o WATERSTOP, CONT #4 @ 12 DRILL HOLES IN EXIST CONC, ANCHOR W/ CHEMICAL ADHESIVE SLAB CONNECTION AT LOADING DOCK 3/4" =1i-0" TOP LONGITUDINAL BARS, SEE SCHED CONC SLAB, SEE PLAN T.O. LOADING DOCK (SEE PLAN) TRANSVERSE BARS, SEE SCHED BOT LONGITUDINAL BARS, SEE SCHED, CONT EXIST EXTERIOR MAS WALL 2'-4" cc 4" O 4" I _ W i f \ WATERSTOP, Ji CONT • • • ft REPAIR CONC BM, SEE PLAN CONC SLAB, SEE PLAN TRANSVERSE BARS, SEE SCHED BOT LONGITUDINAL BARS, SEE SCHED, CONT EXIST 6" BUILDING CONC SLAB DRILL HOLES IN EXIST CONC, ANCHOR W/ CHEMICAL ADHESIVE --------- REMOVE EXIST CONC UNDER EXIST DOORS SILLS AND FOR 8" LG @ 2'-0" OC AT EXIST BRICK FOR NEW SLAB BEARING LOADING DOCK TO EXISTING SLAB CONNECTION S201 % 3/4" =1'-0" EXIST GUARDRAIL EXIST LOADING DOCK CONC SLAB SEE PLAN FOR REPAIR NEW CONC TOPPING W/WATERPROOFING, SEE PLAN EXIST STEEL BM EXIST STEEL BM EXIST METAL GRATING 0" I Yr SWITCHGEAR DOOR EXIST CONC WALL VERTICAL WALL BAR TO BE REPLACED AS REQURIED PER CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES, AT MINIMUM RELOCATE BAR WITHIN WALL TO PROVIDE MIN 1 1/2" COVER, OR MIN 2" COVER FOR #6 BAR OR LARGER, TYP (T SWITCHGEAR ROOM EXTERIOR WALL 2o1 / 3/4" =1'-0" LaBetia Powered by partnership. 105 N. Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation "altered by" followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. © 2018 LaBella Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: MCRB MCM ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 5/22/19 DRAWING NAME: ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS DRAWING NUMBER: S201 5/22/2019 12:02:36 PM C:\Users\MMcCarty\documents\Revit Local Files\2190850 - STR - Newman Floyd Lab Struct.Rep 2019_mmcc KEYED NOTES: SEE PLAN & ELEVATIONS FOR APPROXIMATE QUANTITY OF REPAIR #1 CONCRETE CRACK, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES, NOTE 6. #2 SHALLOW CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES #3 DEEP CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME FULL DEPTH OF MEMBER, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES. EXIST GUARDRAIL EXIST LOADING DOCK CONC SLAB SEE PLAN FOR REPAIR r– NEW CONC TOPPING W/WATERPROOFING, SEE PLAN 25SF EXIST CONC WALL EXIST CONC FLOOR EXIST CONC COL EXIST DOOR EXIST CONC BM EXIST CONC COL EXIST LOUVER EXIST LOUVER EXIST CONC WALL L EXIST CONC BM TO BE REPAIRED, SEE PLAN #3 #3 4 \ SWITCHGEAR ROOM - NORTH WALL _2±0 1/2" = 1'-0" EXIST LOADING DOCK CONC SLAB SEE PLAN FOR REPAIRS #2 AT THREE EDGES OF OPENING, 7 SF FOR EACH OF 4 OPENINGS EXIST CONS BM NEW CONC TOPPING W/WATERPROOFING, SEE PLAN EXIST CONC COL \— EXIST CONC BM TO BE REPAIRED, SEE PLAN #2 12SF EXIST CONC COL EXIST CONS FLOOR 44 e VAULT OPENING 17SF SWITCHGEAR ROOM - SOUTH WALL S200 / 1/2" = 1'-0" 1.OSF 3SF EXIST GUARDRAIL EXIST LOADING DOCK CONC SLAB SEE PLAN FOR REPAIR 4 r NEW CONC TOPPING W/WATERPROOFING, SEE PLAN EXIST CONC WALL N EXIST SHORED TUNNEL 7 S201 EXIST CONS FLOOR #2 60SF INJECT HYDROPHOBIC POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING INTO WALL AT CORNER WHERE WATER IS ENTERING. ACCEPTALBE PRODUCTS INCLUDE: AKWASEALL LV by CETCO AV -248 -LV FLEXSEAL LV by AVANTI 2 SWITCHGEAR ROOM - WEST WALL S200 % 1/2" = 1'-0" NEW CONC TOPPING EXIST CONC W/WATERPROOFING, BM, SEE PLAN SEE PLAN EXIST CONC WALL – EXIST 6" SLAB i 4' EXIST BM REINF, V.I.F. EXIST CONC WALL EXIST CONS COL, SEE PLAN FOR REPAIR EXIST CONC FLOOR .\\ EXIST ELECT CABLES HUNG FROM TRAY, PROTECT W/PLYWOOD AND WORK AROUND \\\\.N\_\_. I \\T\ 7777\777` 4- NOTE: REFER TO 3/S202 FOR PHOTO OF EXISTING CONDITION /-- EXIST ELECT EQUIP, -- \ PROTECT W/ PLYWOOD AND WORK AROUND #2 30SF 4 EXIST CONC COL EXIST CONS WALL 4 - REMOVE AND REPLACE HATCHED AREA OF BEAM #2 2 SF SWITCHGEAR ROOM - EAST WALL 1/2" = LaBetia Powered by partnership. 105 N. Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation "altered by" followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. © 2018 LaBella Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: MCRB MCM ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 5/22/19 DRAWING NAME: SWITCHGEAR ELEVATIONS DRAWING NUMBER: S200 5/22/2019 12:02:35 PM C Local Fileo\2100858'STR Newman Floyd Lab SkuvLRop2010_mmoouAy.nyt KEYED NOTES: SEE PLAN & ELEVATIONS FOR APPROXIMATE QUANTITY OF REPAIR #1 CONCRETE CRACK, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES, NOTE 6. #2 SHALLOW CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES #3 DEEP CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME FULL DEPTH OF MEMBER, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES. FOLD AND SOLDER FLASHING AT EDGE OF CONC WALL TO REMAIN FOR END DAMS (EACH SIDE), PROVIDE SEALANT AT TOP REMOVE TOP OF WALL, SEE PLAN, —\ REPLACE W/NEW TOPPING SET EDGE OF DRAINAGE PANEL BACK FROM EDGE, 1" CONTINUOUS SHEET METAL FLASHING (SEE WATERPROOFING SPEC) W/DRIP EDGE AND HEMMED EDGES EXIST RAILING POST, BEYOND /— DRAINAGE PANEL WATERPROOFING. PER SPEC 6" 1'-0" EXIST CONC WALL /5\TYPICAL FLASHING AT SLAB EDGE 1 1/2" = 1-0" TERMINATION BAR WITH JOINT SEALANT PER WATERPROOFING SPEC TOP BEAD REINFORCING FABRIC EMBEDDED INTO WATERPROOFING AT CORNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH WATERPROOFING MANUF BACKER ROD, AND JOINT SEALANT PER WATERPROOFING SPEC MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS 1'-0" EXIST CONC WALL WATERPROOFING. PER SPEC 4 WATERPROOFING TERMINATION AT WALL EDGE sio±) 1 1/2" = 11-0" CONC BM, SEE PLAN BACKER ROD, AND JOINT SEALANT PER WATERPROOFING SPEC MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS TERMINATION BAR WITH JOINT SEALANT PER WATERPROOFING SPEC TOP BEAD NEW 5" CONC SLAB WATERPROOFING. PER SPEC REINFORCING FABRIC EMBEDDED INTO WATERPROOFING AT CORNER IN ACCORDANCE WITH WATERPROOFING MANUF l' -O" EXIST CONC WALL WATERPROOFING TERMINATION AT SLAB EDGE 1 1/2" = 1-0" 6X6 W1.4X1.4 WWR, EPDXY - COATED, CENTER IN TOPPING NEW CONC TOPPING, HIGH DENSITY EXTERIOR MIX W/PERMEABILITY-REDUCING ADMIXTURE (SEE SPEC), SLOPE FOR DRAINAGE, SEE PLAN LL' • •••••••••iMi CO DRAINAGE PANEL, SEE / WATERPROOFING SPEC REINFORCED WATERPROOFING, 120 MILS, SEE SPEC (REMOVE EXIST WATERPROOFING) • • • EXIST STRUCT CONC SLAB, REPAIR, SEE PLANS AND NOTES (2\TYPICAL WATERPROOFING AND TOPPING DETAIL 1 1/2" = EXIST STEEL RAILING, PREP SURFACE AND PAINT PER DIV 09 SPEC, TYP FULL LENGTH AND HEIGHT #2 EXIST 1' - 0" CONC WALL z = (-40 (S202 6SF 2)-.4 5 S101// 4 #2 2SF (E) 2" METAL GRATING EXIST RAILING POST, TYP 4, -0'-8", V.I.F.\ TOP/TOPPING EXIST STEEL RAILING, PREP SURFACE AND PAINT PER DIV 09 SPEC, TYP FULL LENGTH AND HEIGHT CUT AND REMOVE SECTION OF RAILING TO FACILITATE CONC WALL REPAIR AND REINSTALL (WELD AT CUTS, EMBED POSTS WITH SLEEVE OR ANCHOR BASE PLATE WITH (4) 1/4" DIA SS CONC SCREWS 22' - 6" EXIST 6" STRUCT CONC SLAB (TO REMAIN) V/ WATERPROOFING (REMOVE AND REPLACE W/WATERPROOFING AND DRAINAGE PANEL PER DIV 07 SPEC) AND 4" \CONC TOPPING REMOVE AND REPLACE) 'SEE TYPICAL DETAIL L 2 2 3SF 2SF EACH (AT TOP OF WALL) Th Si Oj) U.J —J (E) 2" METAL GRATING EXIST ANGLE EXIST DOCK BUMPERS TO REMAIN EXIST STEEL RAILING, PREP SURFACE AND PAINT PER DIV 09 SPEC, TYP FULL LENGTH AND HEIGHT S202 , 8' - TOP SLAB 7 SLOPES TO WEST 7 #2 1OSF ( 15LF TOTAL CRACKS THIS AREA C SHORE CHANNEL, CLEAN STEEL AND PAINT PER DIV 09 SPEC, REPAIR CONCRETE WALL, PROVIDE NEW ANCHORS (EXIST TO BE VERIFIED), EMBED CHANNEL WITHIN REPAIRED TOP OF WALL FIRST FLOOR INTERIOR SPACE OF EXISTING BUILDING -7— EXIST CANOPY ABOVE 4SF HW MH LOADING DOCK PLAN 1/4" = 11-0" DATUM ELEVATION OF 0'-0" IS AT FINISHED FIRST FLOOR ELEVATION EXIST EXTERIOR STAIRS LaBella Powered by partnership. 105 N. Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation "altered by" followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. © 2018 LaBella Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: MCRB MCM ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 5/22/19 DRAWING NAME: LOADING DOCK PLAN DRAWING NUMBER: S1 01 5/22/2019 12:02:35 PM C Local Fileo\2100858'STR Newman Floyd Lab SkuvLRop2010_mmoouAy.nyt KEYED NOTES: SEE PLAN & ELEVATIONS FOR APPROXIMATE QUANTITY OF REPAIR #1 CONCRETE CRACK, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES, NOTE 6. #2 SHALLOW CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME 2" DEEP, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES #3 DEEP CONCRETE DETERIORATION, ASSUME FULL DEPTH OF MEMBER, SEE CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES. CONCRETE SLAB SCHEDULE MARK -TYPE SLAB THICKNESS SLAB REINFORCEMENT COMMENTS S1 CONC 5" LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE BOT BARS TOP BARS #4 @ 12 #4 @ 11 #4 @ 12 SEE DETAILS FOR EXTENTS OF REINFORCING. HIGH DENSITY EXTERIOR MIX W/PERMEABILITY-REDUCING ADMIXTURE (SEE SPEC). CONC SLAB REPAIR SHOWN THIS PLAN IS AT UNDERSIDE OF SLAB cc) a >7 o WC) C\J EXIST CONC WALL EXIST 2" METAL GRATING AL T.O. LOADING DOCK \-1' (SEE PLAN) 1' - 0" EXIST SLAB ON GRADE 1 ),EXIST 1' CONC WALL cD• WATERSTOP, CONT L TRANSVERSE BARS, SEE SCHED BOT LONGITUDINAL BARS, SEE SCHED, CONT SLAB CONNECTION AT LOADING DOCK SOUTH 3/4" = EXIST 2' METAL GRATING . 2 (E) 2" METAL .": ., < ...... ,„ 2 2 .••, LLJ CO < CO 4-1,-0" o,c.t . GRATING UJ ••, —1 •'' LIJ .•• ,.: .•• CO (l) .••, . cf) cr) = •.i •••i LLJ LU SHORE CHANNEL FOR \ -J.••: LLJ .••i COORD W/OWNER FOR REMOVAL ----- RECONSTRUCTION OF TOP \ L.1:2 ••., AND REINSTALLATION OF LIGHTS OF CONC WALL, SEE •• cc) .•• .•" FOR CONC REPAIR WORK \ .•• .•• ,.: .•• .•• LOADING DOCK PLAN \ L < .••• #2 6SF EXIST 6" STRUCT CONC SLAB, INCLUDE .42, 90 SF FOR TOP SIDE OF EXIST STRUCT SLAB SEE LOADING DOCK PLAN FOR NEW `- - WATERPROOFING AND TOPPING' - #2 SLOPES TO WEST SWITCHGEAR ROOM EXIST 1' - 0" CONC WALL a , #2 20SF #2 6SF (UNDERSIDE OF SLAB AT OPENING), TYP OF 4 SHORE SLAB ABOVE PRIOR TO BEAM R CONC REPAIR ON CEILING, TYP o„,po EXIST 3'-0" WIDE OPENING, TYP OF 4 22' - 0" V.I.F. 3 S1_00)7 EXIST 13" W X 10" D (PORTION EXPOSED) CONC BM 4, 7 - 31/2 0'-0" EXIST ANGLE MECHANIC SPACE Si L co Co c -Q AL 2 S201 100 EXIST CONC WALL '-0" EXIST 1' - 0" CONC WALL • .: • , .•• . :: .•' : . • .: ." • : : .•' .•• : ..., :: .•• : . . • .•• : .' • .., .:, .:, • .., .•• •.. EXIST OH DOOR PACK REPAIR MORTAR AT GAP UNDER ANGLE BEARING EXIST CONC BM 4, Co EXIST CONC BM 14' - 4" V.I.F. 0 CD EXIST 15^VVX13rD(PORTION EXPOSED 5 18' 3 1/2 SHORE SLAB AND MASONRY BIJILDING WALL ABOVE PRIOR TO BEAM REPAIR WORK EXIST 6" GONG SLAB 0'-0" FIRST FLOOR STRUCTURE OF EXISTING BUILDING 4, 5 BASEMENT ROOF FRAMING PLAN 1/4" = DATUM ELEVATION OF 0'-0" IS AT FINISHED FIRST FLOOR ELEVATION S1002 SEE PLAN FOR TOP OF WALL REPAIR, INCORPORATE COORD SLAB POUR WITH WALL POUR 1' - 0" *hi T.O. LOADING DOCK (SEE PLAN) EXIST METAL GRATING EXIST RAILING POST )(EXIST 1' - 0"), CONC WALL _ CC Cr) WATERSTOP, CONT TRANSVERSE BARS, SEE SCHED BOT LONGITUDINAL BARS, SEE SCHED, CONT 7.- 4 SLAB CONNECTION AT LOADING DOCK NORTH S100 1 3/4" = 1 - 0" EXIST 1 1/2" DIA SLAB DRAINAGE PIPE (UNDER TOPPING - THROUGH WALL) REMOVE PIPE AND PLUG HOLES IN SLAB AND WALL WITH NON -SHRINK GROUT 1"------ EXIST CONC WALL • EXIST 2" METAL EXIST 1' - 0" CONC WALL REMOVE TOP OF WALL, APPROX. 3'-0" LONG (LEAVE 6" MIN FROM FROM CENTER OF EXIST RAILING POSTS), SEE LOADING DOCK PLAN AND DETAILS FOR DEPTH. SAWCUT CLEANLY, TYP OF 5 EXIST 1 1/2" DIA SLAB DRAINAGE PIPE •-•\ (UNDER TOPPING - THROUGH WALL) \. REMOVE PIPE AND PLUG HOLES IN SLAB In AND WALL WITH NON -SHRINK GROUT =wawa GRATING PP - EXIST STL BEAM /\co coo EXIST 6" STRUCT CONC SLAB (TO REMAIN) W/ WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AND 4" CONC TOPPING (SEE LOADING DOCK PLAN FOR REMOVALS) TOP/TOPPING EXIST 3'-0" WIDE OPENING, TYP OF 4 9' - 10" OMIT REMOVING TOP OF EXIST WALL WITHIN 6" EACH SIDE OF RAILING POSTS 1' - 0" T.O. LOADING DOCK (SEE PLAN) EXIST RAILING POST 6"/ 2' - 4" TOP LONGITUDINAL BARS, SEE SCHED )(EXIST 1' - 0"), CONC WALL _ CC C"DQ CD TRANSVERSE BARS, WATERSTOP, CONT SEE SCHED #4 @ 12 DRILL HOLES IN EXIST CONC, ANCHOR W/ CHEMICAL ADHESIVE BOT LONGITUDINAL BARS, SEE SCHED, CONT (3 SLAB CONNECTION AT LOADING DOCK EDGE S100 3/4" = 1 '- 0" EXIST 2" METAL GRATING -1-0" EXIST 1' - 0" CONC WALL SWITCHGEAR ROOM EXIST STEEL ANGLES, REMOVE AND DISCARD 0 4/6'0 EXIST L3X2X5/16 ANGLE BOLTED - TO CONC STRUCTURE @ 3 FT OC - REMOVE REMOVE DAMAGED PORTION PER ELEVATION AND DETAIL SHORE SLAB ABOVE PRIOR TO BEAM REPAIR WORK REMOVE PORTION OF TOP OF WALL FOR NEW SLAB BRG, SEE DETAILS OMIT REMOVING TOP OF EXIST WALL WITHIN 6" EACH SIDE OF RAILING POSTS PM - EXIST STL CHANNEL & (2) ANGLES EXIST 2" METAL! GRATING 0,_ --1 C-0 Cr) Cr) 4, ./\ \EXIST 6" CONC SLAB W/2" \- \ / METAL DECK - REMOVE A(HATCHED AREA LJJ> o 2 (ID (0 0 CC _J\LJJ <LD \ Q LU CC1 Cr) < \ _ D \ "CE \ -1= LL1 X CsJ LU X CC CD \_.J CJD \ LU C_D a_ (ID o 1.1.1 12C CL. EXIST OH DOOR REMOVE TOP OF WALL FOR SLAB CONNX DETAIL AND FOR WALL REPAIR, SEE DETAILS AND LOADING DOCK PLAN EXIST L3X2X5/16 ANGLE BOLTED TO CONC STRUCTURE @ 3 FT OC - REMOVE EXIST CONC BM •, <<e EXIST CONC WALL 31/2“SHORE SLAB AND MASONRY BUILDING Co WALL ABOVE PRIOR TO BEAM REPAIR WORK EXIST CONC BM 14' - 4" V.I.F. FIRST FLOOR STRUCTURE OF EXISTING BUILDING EXIST 6" CONC SLAB 4,1-91 REMOVE TOP OF WALL FOR SLAB CONNX DETAIL, SEE DETAILS ri BASEMENT ROOF FRAMING DEMOLITION PLAN siy 1/4" = 1'-0" DATUM ELEVATION OF 0'-0" IS AT FINISHED FIRST FLOOR ELEVATION CD LaBella Powered by partnership. 105 N. Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation "altered by" followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. © 2018 LaBella Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions 1.1...1 .1 PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: MCRB MCM ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 5/22/19 DRAWING NAME: STRUCTURAL FRAMING PLANS DRAWING NUMBER: s100 5/22/2019 12:02:35 PM C:\Users\MMcCarty\documents\Revit Local Files\2190850 - STR - Newman Floyd Lab Struct.Rep 2019_mmcc GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES: 1. BUILDING CODE: BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE, LATEST EDITION 2. CONSTRUCTION LOADING: DURING CONSTRUCTION, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL LIMIT AND CONTROL CONSTRUCTION LOADING, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: a. MATERIAL STOCKPILING AND EQUIPMENT TO PRECLUDE OVERSTRESSING, CONSTRUCTION LIVE LOAD IN EXCESS OF 20 PSF, OR DAMAGE TO ANY STRUCTURAL ELEMENT. 3. COORDINATION WITH OTHER DISCIPLINES: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL STRUCTURAL WORK WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL, ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ARE PROTECTION DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 4. EXISTING CONDITIONS: THE INFORMATION SHOWN ON THESE DOCUMENTS IS THE BEST REPRESENTATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AVAILABLE TO THE ENGINEER. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO FIELD VERIFY AND BRING TO THE ENGINEER'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ATTENTION ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. 5. EXISTING STRUCTURES: ALL EXISTING STRUCTURES ADJACENT TO NEW WORK ARE TO BE ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AND/OR SUPPORTED DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIRING ANY NEW OR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION DAMAGED WHILE WORK IS IN PROGRESS. 6. OPENINGS: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING SIZE AND LOCATION OF ALL OPENINGS IN NEW AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WITH THE DISCIPLINE REQUIRING THEM. CONCRETE NOTES: 1. SUBMITTALS a. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REINFORCING, INCLUDING ALL NECESSARY ACCESSORIES TO HOLD REINFORCING SECURELY IN PLACE, FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL. WHERE RESUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS IS REQUIRED, ALL REVISIONS SHALL BE CLEARLY IDENTIFIED BY CLOUDING AND REVISION TAGS. b. SUBMIT FOR REVIEW ALL MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR CONCRETE CURING. 2. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM CONCRETE CLEAR COVER FOR REINFORCING STEEL, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.: a. CONCRETE PLACED AGAINST EARTH: 3,0 IN. b. FORMED SURFACES IN CONTACT WITH EARTH OR EXPOSED TO WEATHER #6 THROUGH #18 BARS: 2.01N, #5 BARS AND SMALLER: 1.5 IN. c. FORMED SURFACES NOT IN CONTACT WITH EARTH OR EXPOSED TO WEATHER #14 AND #18 BARS: 1.5 IN. #11 BARS AND SMALLER: 1.0 IN. 3. ALL CONCRETE WORK, CONSTRUCTION, AND REINFORCING DETAILS SHALL CONFORM TO THE "BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE, LATEST EDITION'. 4. ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE DETAILED, FABRICATED AND PLACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 318. 5. ALL REINFORCING BARS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615 GRADE 60 WITH ASTM A934 EPDXY COATING. 6. ALL REINFORCING SHALL BE LAPPED OR EMBEDDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 318, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. PROVIDE CORNER BARS TO MATCH ALL HORIZONTAL REINFORCING AT CORNERS OR INTERSECTIONS, 8. CHAMFER EXTERIOR CORNERS AND EDGES OF PERMANENTLY EXPOSED CONCRETE. 9. PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE, A FIELD REPRESENTATIVE SHALL BE INFORMED A MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS IN ADVANCE OF PLACEMENT, TO ALLOW INSPECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL, AND PREPARATION FOR TAKING CONCRETE SAMPLES. INDEPENDENT TESTS ARE REQUIRED FOR ALL CONCRETE PLACEMENTS. 10. INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE COMPLETED AT LEAST 24 HOURS PRIOR TO THE SCHEDULED CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 11. CHEMICAL ADHESIVE ANCHORS: SEE SPEC. 12. GROUT: NON-METALLIC/NON-SHRINK STRUCTURAL GROUT. 13. PROTECT CONCRETE FROM PREMATURE DRYING IMMEDIATELY AFTER PLACEMENT, CURING OF CONCRETE SLABS MUST START WITHIN 2 HOURS AFTER FINISHING OPERATIONS ARE COMPLETE. SLABS -ON -GRADE SHALL BE WET CURED FOR 7 DAYS, CURING COMPOUNDS ARE PROHIBITED. 14. CONCRETE SHALL BE CONTROLLED, PROPORTIONED, MIXED AND PLACED IN THE PRESENCE OF A REPRESENTATIVE OF AN APPROVED TESTING AGENCY. 15. ALUMINUM CONDUITS OR PIPES SHALL NOT BE PLACED IN CONCRETE. 16. AIR -ENTRAINING ADMIXTURE SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C260 AND WATER -REDUCING ADMIXTURES SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C494 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND STEEL RAILING NOTES: 1. SUBMITTALS: a. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL WHERE SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS IS REQUIRED, ALL REVISIONS SHALL BE CLEARLY IDENTIFIED BY CLOUDING AND REVISION TAGS. b. WELDER QUALIFICATIONS c. WELDING PROCEDURE FOR WELDING TO EXISTING STEEL 2. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING: a. BARS AND ANGLES• ASTM A36 3. BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING: HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS (AS INDICATED ON PLANS) ASTM A325, ASTM A490 4. ANCHOR RODS SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING: ANCHOR RODS (U.O.N.) ASTM F1554, GRADE 36, WELDABLE (S1) 5. WELDING ELECTRODES SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING: AWS SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRODES BASED ON WELDING PROCESS AND THE TYPE AND GRADE OF STEEL. E70XX ELECTRODES (MIN.) FOR FILLET WELDS. 6. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE DETAILED, FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST AISC SPECIFICATIONS. 7. SHOP FABRICATE TO THE GREATEST EXTENT POSSIBLE BY WELDING INCLUDING BEAM STIFFENERS, COLUMN CAPS AND BASES, HOLES AND CONNECTIONS. 8. CUTS, HOLES, COPES, ETC., REQUIRED FOR WORK OF THE OTHER TRADES SHALL BE SHOWN ON SHOP DRAWINGS AND MADE IN THE SHOP. FIELD CUTTING OR BURNING WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 9. ALL WELDING BOTH SHOP AND FIELD SHALL BE PERFORMED BY CERTIFIED WELDERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWS SPECIFICATIONS. WELDING ELECTRODES SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A233, E70 -XX. MINIMUM WELD SIZE SHALL BE 1/4 INCHES (FILLET) UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 10. FINISH: APPLY FINISH PAINT TO ALL EXISTING STRUCTURAL STEEL AND EXISTING STEEL RAILINGS AS INDICATED AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIV 09 SPECIFICATION, GALVANIZED: IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A780. 11. AFTER ERECTION, ALL DAMAGED AREAS IN THE SHOP COAT AND AT ALL FIELD WELD LOCATIONS, SHALL BE TOUCHED UP WITH THE SAME PAINT USED FOR THE PRIMER AND SHOP COAT. PREPARE SURFACES IN ACCORDANCE WITH SSPC-SP3, FOR PAINTED FINISH, OR IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A780 IF FINISH IS GALVANIZED. 12. FABRICATE AND ERECT ALL AESS PER THE REQUIREMENTS SHOWN IN THE SPECIFICATION. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: 1 DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ONLY TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION AND AS INDICATED. USE METHODS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE WORK WITHIN LIMITATIONS OF GOVERNING REGULATIONS AND AS FOLLOWS: a. PROCEED WITH SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SYSTEMATICALLY, FROM HIGHER TO LOWER LEVEL. COMPLETE SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS ABOVE EACH FLOOR OR TIER BEFORE DISTURBING SUPPORTING MEMBERS ON THE NEXT LOWER LEVEL. b. NEATLY CUT OPENINGS AND HOLES PLUMB, SQUARE, AND TRUE TO DIMENSIONS REQUIRED, USE CUTTING METHODS LEAST LIKELY TO DAMAGE CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN OR ADJOINING CONSTRUCTION. USE HAND TOOLS OR SMALL POWER TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SAWING OR GRINDING, NOT HAMMERING AND CHOPPING, TO MINIMIZE DISTURBANCE OF ADJACENT SURFACES. TEMPORARILY COVER OPENINGS TO MAINTAIN A WATERTIGHT CONDITION UNTIL PERMANENT CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE. c. CUT OR DRILL FROM THE EXPOSED OR FINISHED SIDE INTO CONCEALED SURFACES. AVOID MARRING EXISTING FINISHED SURFACES. d. NO FLAME CUTTING. e. REMOVE DECAYED, VERMIN -INFESTED, OR OTHERWISE DANGEROUS OR UNSUITABLE NON -HAZARDOUS MATERIALS, PROMPTLY DISPOSE OF OFF-SITE. f. ASBESTOS CONTAMINATED MATERICAL (ACM) / HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: OWNER TO ADDRESS REMOVAL OF ACM/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. g. REMOVE STRUCTURAL FRAMING MEMBERS AND LOWER TO GROUND BY METHOD SUITABLE TO AVOID FREE FALL AND TO PREVENT GROUND IMPACT OR DUST GENERATION. h. LOCATE SELECTIVE DEMOLITION EQUIPMENT AND REMOVE DEBRIS AND MATERIALS SO AS NOT TO IMPOSE EXCESSIVE LOADS ON SUPPORTING WALLS, FLOORS, OR FRAMING. i. DISPOSE OF DEBRIS OFF-SITE PROMPTLY AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE REGULATIONS AND CODES. 2. BUILDING ELEMENTS TO REMAIN: DO NOT DEMOLISH BUILDING ELEMENTS BEYOND LIMITS INDICATED. 3. EXISTING ITEMS TO REMAIN: PROTECT CONSTRUCTION INDICATED TO REMAIN AGAINST DAMAGE AND SOILING DURING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION. WHEN PERMITTED BY OWNER, ITEMS MAY BE REMOVED TO A SUITABLE. PROTECTED STORAGE LOCATION DURING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANED AND REINSTALLED IN THEIR ORIGINAL LOCATIONS AFTER SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS ARE COMPLETE. COMPLY WITH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR NEW MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE CONNECTIONS, SUPPORTS, AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS NECESSARY TO MAKE ITEM FUNCTIONAL FOR USE INDICATED. 4. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS: a. REINFORCED CONCRETE: DEMOLISH IN SMALL SECTIONS. SAW CUT CONCRETE TO A DEPTH OF AT LEAST 3/4 INCH AT JUNCTURES WITH CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN. DISLODGE CONCRETE FROM REINFORCEMENT AT PERIMETER OF AREAS BEING DEMOLISHED, CUT REINFORCEMENT, AND THEN REMOVE REMAINDER OF CONCRETE INDICATED FOR SELECTIVE DEMOLITION USING MAXIMUM 15 -LB CHIPPING HAMMER. NEATLY TRIM OPENINGS TO DIMENSIONS INDICATED. b. GENERAL: EXCEPT FOR ITEMS OR MATERIALS INDICATED TO BE RECYCLED, REUSED, SALVAGED, REINSTALLED, OR OTHERWISE INDICATED TO REMAIN OWNERS PROPERTY, REMOVE DEMOLISHED MATERIALS FROM PROJECT SITE AND LEGALLY DISPOSE OF THEM IN AN EPA -APPROVED LANDFILL. 5. DO NOT ALLOW DEMOLISHED MATERIALS TO ACCUMULATE ON-SITE. 6. REMOVE AND TRANSPORT DEBRIS IN A MANNER THAT WILL PREVENT SPILLAGE ON ADJACENT SURFACES AND AREAS. 7. REMOVE DEBRIS FROM ELEVATED PORTIONS OF BUILDING BY CHUTE, HOIST, OR OTHER DEVICE THAT WILL CONVEY DEBRIS TO GRADE LEVEL IN A CONTROLLED DESCENT. 8. BURNING: DO NOT BURN DEMOLISHED MATERIALS. 9. DISPOSAL: TRANSPORT DEMOLISHED MATERIALS OFF OWNER'S PROPERTY AND LEGALLY DISPOSE OF THEM. 10. CLEANING: CLEAN ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND IMPROVEMENTS OF DUST, DIRT, AND DEBRIS CAUSED BY ALL DEMOLITION OPERATIONS, RETURN ADJACENT AREAS TO CONDITION EXISTING BEFORE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS BEGAN, CONCRETE REPAIR NOTES: 1. REMOVE ALL LOOSE AND DETERIORATED CONCRETE TO A SOUND SUBSTRATE AND WHERE THE EXPOSED REINF. BARS SHOW ONLY LIGHT RUST, EXPOSE ALL REINF. BARS SO THAT A DISTANCE OF AT LEAST 1" IS PROVIDED AROUND EACH BAR. WORK TO BE DONE BY SCABBLER OR OTHER MECHANICAL MEANS TO OBTAIN AN AGGREGATE -FRACTURED SURFACE WITH A MINIMUM SURFACE PROFILE OF 1/16" +/-. 2. SANDBLAST CONCRETE AND REBAR, REMOVE DUST AND DEBRIS. 3. REPLACE REBAR AS REQUIRED AND ADD NEW REBAR TO ALL EXISTING REBAR WITH 10% OR MORE LOSS OF SECTIONAL AREA OF EACH BAR. SPLICE REBAR PER ACI AND MATCH EXISTING DIAMETER. 4. SATURATE AREA TO BE REPAIRED WITH WATER. REMOVE ANY STANDING WATER. DO NOT ALLOW TO DRY OUT AS REPAIR IS PROGRESSING, 5. IMMEDIATELY APPLY AN APPROPRIATE REPAIR MATERIAL: a. IF PATCH THICKNESS IS LESS THAN 1 1/2', FILL WITH REPAIR MATERIAL IN 1/2" LAYERS. FOR VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD SURFACES - A REPAIR MORTAR PER SPEC; FOR HORIZONTAL SURFACES - A REPAIR OVERLAYMENT PER SPEC b. OTHERWISE FILL WITH CONCRETE MIX (REFER TO CONCRETE SPECIFICATIONS) IN FORMS. c, APPLY PATCH TO BRING CONCRETE SURFACE BACK TO THE ORIGINAL FINISHED SURFACE. 6. FOR CRACK REPAIR: a. REMOVE AREA OF DEFECT TO A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 1". SQUARE EDGES OF PERIMETER TO AVOID FEATHERING. b. SATURATE AREA TO BE REPAIRED WITH WATER. REMOVE ANY STANDING WATER. DO NOT ALLOW TO DRY OUT AS REPAIR IS PROGRESSING. c. IMMEDIATELY APPLY AN APPROPRIATE MATERIAL; FOR VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD SURFACES - A REPAIR MORTAR PER SPEC; FOR HORIZONTAL SURFACES - A REPAIR OVERLAYMENT PER SPEC. d. ONCE PATCH IS CURED, FINISH TO MATCH EXSTING TEXTURE. STRUCTURAL DESIGN TABLE - IBC 2015 VERSION (IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE) BUILDING DATA: LOCATION BUILDING OCCUPANCY RISK CATEGORY APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE NEWMAN LABORATORY ITHACA, NY 14853 II IBC 2015 TABLE 1604.5 NEW YORK STATE FLOOR LIVE LOAD: LOADING DOCK LL1 150 PSF / 1000 LBS IBC 2015 TABLE 1607.1 SNOW LOAD: SNOW LOAD IMPORTANCE FACTOR GROUND SNOW LOAD SNOW EXPOSURE FACTOR THERMAL FACTOR FLAT ROOF SNOW DRIFTING SNOW Is Pg Ce Ct Pf 1.0 ASCE 7-10 TABLE 1.5-2 40 IBC 2015 FIGURE 1608.2 1.0 ASCE 7-10 TABLE 7-2 1.1 ASCE 7-10 TABLE 7-3 30.8 PSF ASCE 7-10 SECTION 7.3 AS REQ. PER ASCE 7-10 ASCE 7-10 SECTION 7.7 WIND LOAD (MAIN WIND -FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM): ANALYSIS PROCEDURE ULTIMATE DESIGN WIND SPEED (3 -SECOND GUST) NOMINAL DESIGN WIND SPEED (3 -SECOND GUST) EXPOSURE CATEGORY INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT Vult Vasd GCpi DIRECTIONAL PROCEDURE ASCE 7-10 CHAPTER 27 115 mph ASCE 7-10 SECTION 26.5 89 mph IBC 2015 SECTION 1609.3.1 B ASCE 7-10 SECTION 26.7 +0.18/-0.18 ASCE 7-10 SECTION 26.11 EARTHQUAKE LOAD: SOIL SITE CLASSIFICATION SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATION AT 0.2 SEC SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATION AT 1.0 SEC SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR DESIGN SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFFICIENT DESIGN SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFFICIENT SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY Ss S1 le SDS SD1 D ASCE 7-10 SECTION 20.3 0.126g ASCE 7-10 FIGURE 22-1 0.056g ASCE 7-10 SECTION 11.4.1 1.00 ASCE 7-10 TABLE 1.5-2 0.134g ASCE 7-10 SECTION 11.4.4 0.09g ASCE 7-10 SECTION 11.4.4 B ASCE 7-10 TABLE 11.6-(1&2) STRUCTURAL ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND ACI AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE IAISC AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS TAWS AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY APPROX. APPROXIMATE ARCH. ARCHITECT/ARCHITECTURAL B.F. BOTTOM FACE B.O. CIP CONC. C.J. CONT. COV. DIA. E.F. E.S. E.W. ELEV, EQ. EXIST. (E) F.F.E. FW F.D. �!F FTG. FNDN. GA. GALV. H.P. H.S. BOTTOM OF CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION JOINT CONTINUOUS COVER DIAMETER EACH FACE EACH SIDE EACH WAY ELEVATION EQUAL EXISTING EXISTING FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION FLATWISE FLOOR DRAIN FOOTING FOOTING FOUNDATION GAGE GALVANIZED HIGH POINT HIGH STRENGTH STRUCTURAL ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND HORIZ. I.F. LLH LLV MANUF. MAX. MECH. MIN. (N) 0.0. O.F. P PLF REINF. HORIZONTAL INSIDE FACE LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LONG LEG VERTICAL MANUFACTURER MAXIMUM MECHANICAL MINIMUM NEW ON CENTER OUTSIDE FACE PIER (SEE SCHEDULE) POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT RENFORCING, REINFORCEMENT S.J. SAW -CUT CONTROL JOINT SPA., SP. SPACE OR SPACING STD. STANDARD SDI STEEL DECK INSTITUTE TSF T&B T.F. T.O. T.O.S. TYP, U.O.N. V.I.F. VERT. W.W.R. W/ W.P. TON PER SQUARE FOOT TOP & BOTTOM TOP FACE TOP OF TOP OF STEEL TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VERIFY IN FIELD VERTICAL WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT WITH WORKING POINT LaBetia Powered by partnership. 105 N. Tioga Street, Suite 200 Ithaca, NY 14850 607-319-4136 labellapc.com It is a violation of New York Education Law Article 145 Sec.7209, for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed architect, professional engineer, or land surveyor, to alter an item in any way. If an item bearing the seal of an architect, engineer, or land surveyor is altered; the altering architect, engineer, or land surveyor shall affix to the item their seal and notation "altered by" followed by their signature and date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. © 2018 LaBella Associates CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NEWMAN FLOYD LABORATORY LOADING DOCK AND MECHANICAL ROOM STRUCTURAL REPAIRS NEWMAN, FLOYD R. LABORATORY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NY 14853 NO: DATE: DESCRIPTION: Revisions PROJECT NUMBER: 2190850 DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY: MCRB MCM ISSUED FOR: BIDDING DATE: 5/22/19 DRAWING NAME: GENERAL NOTES DRAWING NUMBER: S001